1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
208 \begin_layout Standard
209 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
210 LatexCommand tableofcontents
217 \begin_layout Chapter
221 \begin_layout Section
222 What is \SpecialChar LyX
226 \begin_layout Standard
228 is a document preparation system.
229 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
230 scripts, publishable books, business
231 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
232 It is unlike most other
233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
240 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
242 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 pt type, left justified, 5
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
272 \begin_layout Standard
273 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
278 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
282 \begin_layout Standard
287 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
288 's philosophy: most importantly,
289 the format of all of the manuals.
290 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
291 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
297 manual describes that, too.
300 \begin_layout Section
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
307 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
309 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
310 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
316 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
317 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
319 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
320 only a vertical scrollbar.
321 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
322 The first case is large images.
323 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
324 image and use the option
335 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
338 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
339 this doesn't work for equations yet.
342 \begin_layout Standard
343 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
344 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
352 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
359 \begin_layout Section
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
366 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
368 Just select the manual you want to read from the
375 \begin_layout Section
376 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
380 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
389 can be configured via the menu
391 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
395 \begin_inset Index idx
398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
405 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 packages are available.
409 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
411 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
413 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
418 \begin_inset space \space{}
421 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
422 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
424 To force \SpecialChar LyX
425 to re-inspect your system, you should use
427 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
431 \begin_inset Index idx
434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
435 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
441 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
442 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
445 \begin_layout Section
448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
450 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
457 \begin_layout Standard
458 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
459 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
460 installed, but you will not be
461 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
462 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
463 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
464 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
465 document can always be output as plain text
469 \begin_layout Standard
470 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 or DocBook classes or packages.
472 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
473 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
476 \begin_layout Standard
477 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
478 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
479 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
482 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
491 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
498 \begin_inset Index idx
501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
502 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
510 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
517 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
521 \begin_layout Chapter
522 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
526 \begin_layout Section
527 Basic File Operations
528 \begin_inset Index idx
531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
540 \begin_layout Standard
545 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
546 in addition to some more advanced operations:
549 \begin_layout Itemize
571 \begin_layout Itemize
587 arg "buffer-new-template"
593 \begin_layout Itemize
615 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
639 \begin_layout Itemize
661 \begin_layout Itemize
673 arg "buffer-write-as"
679 \begin_layout Itemize
693 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \begin_layout Standard
708 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
709 a few minor differences.
712 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
723 command lists the available templates.
724 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
725 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
726 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
734 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
774 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
775 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
776 is just that — a big, blank space.
784 \begin_layout Standard
805 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
810 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
813 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
831 will reload the document from disk.
832 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
833 and want to restore it to the last save.
842 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
843 them as your changes.
846 \begin_layout Section
847 Basic Editing Features
848 \begin_inset Index idx
851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
860 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
867 \begin_layout Standard
868 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
869 can perform cut and paste operations
870 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
871 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
872 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
873 editing features and how to access
875 We will start with cut and paste.
878 \begin_layout Standard
879 As you might expect, the
883 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
884 various other editing features.
885 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
889 \begin_layout Itemize
895 \begin_inset Index idx
898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
927 \begin_layout Itemize
933 \begin_inset Index idx
936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
965 \begin_layout Itemize
971 \begin_inset Index idx
974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_inset space ~
1009 \begin_layout Itemize
1013 \begin_inset space ~
1019 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1033 \begin_inset Index idx
1036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1045 \begin_inset Index idx
1048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1063 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1073 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1079 \begin_layout Standard
1080 The first three are self-explanatory.
1081 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1082 and other programs by
1103 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1104 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1109 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1110 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1111 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1112 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1113 into individual cells.
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1122 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1123 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1127 \begin_layout Standard
1131 \begin_inset space ~
1136 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1138 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1140 \begin_inset space ~
1147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1153 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1154 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1155 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1161 \begin_inset space \space{}
1164 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1165 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1168 \begin_inset space ~
1171 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1181 \begin_inset space ~
1190 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1191 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1193 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1197 \begin_inset space ~
1202 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1203 start a new paragraph.
1204 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1205 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1213 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1227 \begin_inset space ~
1230 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1233 paste from the primary selection.
1234 This is normally the currently selected text.
1237 \begin_layout Standard
1240 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1242 \begin_inset space ~
1246 \begin_inset space ~
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1270 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1282 \begin_inset space ~
1287 button to skip the current word.
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1296 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1300 \begin_inset space ~
1305 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1307 If the toggle is set, searching for
1308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1319 will not match the word
1320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1334 Match whole words only
1336 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1337 to only find complete words, e.
1338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1367 offers also an advanced
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1379 feature that is described in section
1380 \begin_inset space ~
1384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1386 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1393 \begin_layout Standard
1394 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1395 \begin_inset space \space{}
1399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1407 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1409 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1414 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1421 \begin_layout Standard
1425 arg "inset-select-all"
1428 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1429 When the cursor is inside an inset
1432 arg "inset-select-all"
1435 selects the content of the inset.
1439 arg "inset-select-all"
1442 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1447 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1450 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1454 \begin_layout Section
1456 \begin_inset Index idx
1459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1466 \begin_inset Index idx
1469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1478 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1488 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1494 or the toolbar button
1500 to undo some mistake.
1501 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1506 or the toolbar button
1513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1520 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1524 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1527 \begin_layout Standard
1528 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1537 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1538 This is a consequence of the 100
1539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1542 step undo limit mentioned above.
1545 \begin_layout Standard
1554 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1556 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1560 \begin_layout Section
1562 \begin_inset Index idx
1565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1574 \begin_layout Standard
1575 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1578 \begin_layout Enumerate
1583 \begin_layout Itemize
1588 once anywhere in the edit window.
1589 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1593 \begin_layout Enumerate
1598 \begin_layout Itemize
1605 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1611 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1612 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1615 \begin_layout Itemize
1616 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1660 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1663 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1669 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1672 \begin_layout Itemize
1673 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1675 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1677 \begin_inset space ~
1682 or by the toolbar button
1685 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1691 \begin_layout Itemize
1692 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1694 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1697 and use the same menu to return to them.
1698 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1701 \begin_layout Standard
1705 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1710 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 \begin_inset space ~
1718 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1719 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1720 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1721 your last editing position.
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1729 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1733 \begin_layout Subsection
1735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1737 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_inset Index idx
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1746 Navigating ! Outline
1752 \begin_inset Index idx
1755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1764 \begin_layout Standard
1765 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1766 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1767 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1775 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1779 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1786 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1791 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1797 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1798 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1799 dialog and to modify the citation.
1802 \begin_layout Standard
1807 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1808 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1810 Labels and References
1812 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1821 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1824 \begin_layout Standard
1825 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1826 you further to control the display.
1831 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1832 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1838 option keeps it in the current view state.
1839 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1847 3, the subsections of sections
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1851 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1856 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1861 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1871 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1881 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1882 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1896 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1897 So, for example, you can move section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1902 \begin_inset space ~
1905 2.4 or after section
1906 \begin_inset space ~
1911 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1924 (or the corresponding key bindings
1932 ) you can change the level of sections.
1933 So you can for example make section
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1948 \begin_layout Standard
1949 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1950 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1953 \begin_layout Subsection
1954 Horizontal Scrolling
1955 \begin_inset Index idx
1958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1959 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1967 \begin_layout Standard
1969 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1975 \begin_inset space \space{}
1979 \begin_inset space ~
1982 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1983 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1984 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1988 \begin_layout Standard
1989 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1993 \begin_layout Itemize
1995 is used on a small tablet computer
1998 \begin_layout Itemize
1999 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2011 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_layout Itemize
2025 Math constructs with long command names
2028 \begin_layout Standard
2029 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2030 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2032 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2033 windows so that table
2034 \begin_inset space ~
2038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2040 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2045 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2047 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2048 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2051 \begin_layout Standard
2052 \begin_inset Float table
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2059 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2064 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2068 Horizontal scrolling test.
2076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2078 \begin_inset Tabular
2079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2125 \begin_layout Section
2126 Input/Word Completion
2127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2129 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2134 \begin_inset Index idx
2137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_inset Index idx
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2180 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2182 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2183 is used to propose completions.
2186 \begin_layout Standard
2187 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2190 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2195 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2211 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2215 \begin_inset space ~
2220 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2221 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2231 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2232 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2233 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2234 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2239 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2240 completions available.
2245 key to accept a proposed completion.
2246 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2247 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2248 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2255 \begin_layout Standard
2256 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2257 ing options for text.
2258 The special math option
2262 enables characters to be composed.
2263 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2264 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2267 , you can then input the characters
2268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2279 to a formula to get it.
2280 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2281 of the math toolbar.
2282 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2286 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2287 's installation folder.
2288 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2297 \begin_layout Section
2299 \begin_inset Index idx
2302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_inset Index idx
2312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_inset Index idx
2344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2375 \begin_layout Standard
2376 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2390 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2393 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2397 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2404 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2411 \begin_layout Standard
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2423 \begin_inset space ~
2444 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2448 \begin_layout Labeling
2449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2453 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2454 LatexCommand nomenclature
2456 description "Tabulator key"
2463 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2465 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2466 \begin_inset space ~
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2472 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2479 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2483 , especially section
2484 \begin_inset space ~
2488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2490 reference "subsec:Lists"
2496 If you are still confused, look in the
2501 \begin_inset Newline newline
2509 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2510 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2514 \begin_layout Labeling
2515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2519 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2520 LatexCommand nomenclature
2522 description "Escape key"
2530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2537 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2538 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2541 \begin_layout Labeling
2542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2548 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2559 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2560 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2564 \begin_layout Standard
2565 There are three modifier keys:
2568 \begin_layout Labeling
2569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2588 LatexCommand nomenclature
2590 description "Control key"
2595 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2596 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2600 \begin_layout Itemize
2609 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2612 \begin_layout Itemize
2621 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2624 \begin_layout Itemize
2633 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2637 \begin_layout Labeling
2638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2656 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2657 LatexCommand nomenclature
2659 description "Shift key"
2664 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2665 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2668 \begin_layout Labeling
2669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2687 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2688 LatexCommand nomenclature
2690 description "Alt or Meta key"
2695 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2696 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2697 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2703 \begin_inset Newline newline
2706 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2708 menu accelerator keys
2711 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2712 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2716 \begin_layout Standard
2717 For example, the sequence
2718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2724 \begin_inset space ~
2728 \begin_inset space ~
2734 \begin_inset space ~
2742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2761 \begin_inset space ~
2767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2782 manual lists all other things bound to the
2790 \begin_layout Standard
2791 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2793 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2794 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2795 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2796 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2797 The \SpecialChar LyX
2798 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2799 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2800 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2802 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2818 followed by a capital
2825 \begin_layout Chapter
2828 \begin_inset Index idx
2831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2841 \begin_layout Section
2843 \begin_inset Index idx
2846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2855 \begin_layout Subsection
2859 \begin_layout Standard
2860 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2861 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2862 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2863 numbering schemes, and so on.
2864 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2865 and format the title of your document differently.
2868 \begin_layout Standard
2873 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2874 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2875 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2876 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2877 picks one for you by default.
2878 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2881 \begin_layout Subsection
2883 \begin_inset Index idx
2886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2895 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2902 \begin_layout Standard
2903 You can select a class using the
2905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2906 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2910 \begin_inset Index idx
2913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2920 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2934 \begin_layout Description
2935 Article for basic articles
2938 \begin_layout Description
2939 Report for basic reports
2942 \begin_layout Description
2943 Book for writing a book
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 Letter for US-style letters
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2951 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2952 only uses if you have installed
2953 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2954 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 distributions will include
2957 Here are some of the classes.
2958 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2960 Special Document Classes
2969 \begin_layout Description
2970 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2973 \begin_layout Description
2974 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2978 \begin_layout Description
2979 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2983 \begin_layout Description
2984 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2985 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2986 There are three article layouts available.
2987 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2988 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2989 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2990 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2995 sequential numbering
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2999 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3000 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3001 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3002 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3005 \begin_layout Description
3006 Beamer Layout for presentations
3009 \begin_layout Description
3010 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3011 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3012 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3013 with \SpecialChar LyX
3017 \begin_layout Description
3018 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3021 \begin_layout Description
3023 \begin_inset space ~
3026 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3029 \begin_layout Description
3030 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Foils Used to make transparencies
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3039 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3041 with \SpecialChar LyX
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3047 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3050 \begin_layout Description
3051 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3054 \begin_layout Description
3055 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3058 \begin_layout Description
3059 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3060 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3061 (Is used by this document.)
3064 \begin_layout Description
3065 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3068 \begin_layout Description
3069 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3072 \begin_layout Description
3077 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3078 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3080 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Slides Used to make transparencies
3088 \begin_layout Description
3090 \begin_inset space ~
3093 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3094 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3097 \begin_layout Description
3098 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3104 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3106 Special Document Classes
3113 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3114 of the document classes.
3117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3121 \begin_layout Standard
3122 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 \begin_inset Index idx
3130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3148 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3150 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3153 \begin_layout Standard
3156 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3161 , are highly specialized.
3163 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3164 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3165 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3166 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3167 by some document class.
3168 There are just too many of them.
3169 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3172 \begin_layout Standard
3173 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3181 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3182 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3183 document class for a new file.
3185 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3188 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3195 manual for information on how to install them.
3196 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3202 \begin_layout Standard
3203 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3204 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3205 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3206 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3207 class files to be used for dissertation
3208 s submitted to those universities.
3209 The \SpecialChar LyX
3210 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3212 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3216 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3222 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3229 name "subsec:Modules"
3234 \begin_inset Index idx
3237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3246 \begin_layout Standard
3247 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3248 chosen document class.
3249 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3250 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3261 \begin_inset Index idx
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3275 \begin_layout Standard
3276 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3277 packages or file format converters that are not always
3278 installed by default.
3280 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3281 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3282 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3283 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3285 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3286 file without the missing prerequisites.
3287 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3288 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3295 \begin_inset Index idx
3298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3305 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3310 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3313 \begin_layout Standard
3314 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3324 will advise you about these things.
3332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3336 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3341 \begin_inset Index idx
3344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3345 Document ! Local Layout
3353 \begin_layout Standard
3354 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3355 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3356 : They are intended to be used in
3357 a variety of different documents.
3358 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3359 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3360 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3361 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3362 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3364 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3382 manual for information on how to use it.
3385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3389 \begin_layout Standard
3390 Each class has a default set of options.
3391 Here's a quick table describing them:
3394 \begin_layout Standard
3395 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3401 \begin_layout Standard
3403 \begin_inset Tabular
3404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3405 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3864 \begin_layout Standard
3865 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3871 \begin_layout Standard
3872 You're probably also wondering what
3873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3877 \begin_inset space ~
3881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3885 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3886 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3891 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3896 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3906 headings, there are also
3914 headings, and so on.
3915 We will describe these headings fully in section
3916 \begin_inset space ~
3920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3922 reference "subsec:Headings"
3929 \begin_layout Subsection
3931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3933 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3938 \begin_inset Index idx
3941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_inset Index idx
3951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3960 \begin_layout Standard
3961 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3983 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3985 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3986 doesn't support special options you want to
3987 use for your document.
3988 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3989 -class and its options, you have to read
3993 \begin_layout Standard
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4010 \begin_inset space ~
4015 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4016 You can choose between the following five options:
4019 \begin_layout Labeling
4020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4025 Use default page style of current class.
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 No page numbers or headings.
4037 \begin_layout Labeling
4038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4046 \begin_layout Labeling
4047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4052 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4053 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4054 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4055 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4058 \begin_layout Labeling
4059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4064 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4065 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4071 \begin_inset Index idx
4074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4082 How they are defined is explained in section
4083 \begin_inset space ~
4087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4089 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4096 \begin_layout Standard
4097 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4098 \begin_inset space ~
4102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4104 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4111 \begin_layout Subsection
4112 Paper Size and Orientation
4113 \begin_inset Index idx
4116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4117 Document ! Paper size
4123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4125 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 You can find the following options in the menu
4136 \begin_inset space ~
4143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4147 \begin_inset Index idx
4150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 \begin_layout Labeling
4160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4164 \begin_inset space ~
4169 What size paper to print on.
4174 \begin_layout Itemize
4180 \begin_layout Itemize
4186 \begin_layout Itemize
4192 \begin_layout Itemize
4198 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 US letter, US legal, US executive
4204 \begin_layout Itemize
4210 \begin_layout Itemize
4217 \begin_layout Labeling
4218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4223 To choose whether to output as
4234 \begin_layout Labeling
4235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4244 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4245 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4248 \begin_layout Subsection
4250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4252 name "subsec:Margins"
4257 \begin_inset Index idx
4260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4267 \begin_inset Index idx
4270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 \begin_layout Standard
4280 Paper margins are set in the menu
4282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4286 \begin_inset Index idx
4289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4300 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4301 the paper format and the font size into account.
4304 \begin_layout Subsection
4308 \begin_layout Standard
4309 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4315 That includes the paragraph environments.
4316 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4317 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4318 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4320 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4329 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4331 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4332 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4333 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4336 \begin_layout Section
4337 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4338 \begin_inset Index idx
4341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4342 Paragraph ! Indentation
4350 \begin_layout Subsection
4352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4354 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4361 \begin_layout Standard
4362 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4363 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4366 \begin_layout Standard
4367 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4368 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4369 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4370 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4374 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4380 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4381 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4382 language than English.
4384 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4387 \begin_layout Standard
4388 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4389 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4390 into \SpecialChar LyX
4392 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4395 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4397 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4398 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4399 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4406 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4407 goes to produce a printable file.
4412 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4414 gives you the ability globally to change
4418 these pre-coded spacings.
4419 We will explain more later.
4422 \begin_layout Subsection
4423 Paragraph Separation
4424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4426 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4431 \begin_inset Index idx
4434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 Paragraph ! Separation
4443 \begin_layout Standard
4451 \begin_inset space ~
4459 \begin_inset space ~
4466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4470 \begin_inset Index idx
4473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4479 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4482 \begin_layout Subsection
4486 \begin_layout Standard
4487 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4492 \begin_inset space ~
4497 dialog and toggle the
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4505 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4508 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4512 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4513 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4517 \begin_layout Standard
4518 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4519 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4522 \begin_layout Subsection
4524 \begin_inset Index idx
4527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4528 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4536 \begin_layout Standard
4539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4543 \begin_inset Index idx
4546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4555 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4559 \begin_inset space ~
4568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4569 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4575 \begin_inset Index idx
4578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4585 installed to use this feature.
4590 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4592 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4594 \begin_inset space ~
4599 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4600 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4603 \begin_layout Section
4604 Paragraph Environments
4605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4607 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4612 \begin_inset Index idx
4615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4616 Paragraph ! Environments
4622 \begin_inset Index idx
4625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4626 Paragraph environments|(
4634 \begin_layout Subsection
4638 \begin_layout Standard
4639 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4642 \begin_layout Standard
4651 } \SpecialChar ldots
4661 \begin_inset Newline newline
4664 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4666 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4668 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4677 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4681 A paragraph environment is simply a
4682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4689 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4690 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4691 scheme, labels, and so on.
4692 Additionally, you can
4693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4700 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4701 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4702 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4703 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4705 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4707 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4710 \begin_layout Standard
4711 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4712 \begin_inset Graphics
4713 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4719 at the left end of the toolbar.
4721 will change the environment of the
4725 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4726 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4727 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4740 create a new paragraph using the
4744 paragraph environment.
4746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4753 because if you are in one of these environments:
4756 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 \begin_layout Itemize
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4780 \begin_layout Itemize
4786 \begin_layout Itemize
4792 \begin_layout Itemize
4798 \begin_layout Standard
4800 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4804 , rather than resetting it to
4809 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4810 \begin_inset space ~
4814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4816 reference "sec:Nesting"
4823 \begin_layout Subsection
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4828 The default paragraph environment is
4833 It creates a plain paragraph.
4835 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4836 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4837 this manual) are in the
4844 \begin_layout Standard
4845 You can nest a paragraph using the
4849 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4857 \begin_layout Subsection
4859 \begin_inset Index idx
4862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4871 \begin_layout Standard
4872 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4873 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4882 for thanks or contact information.
4883 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4884 places all of this on a separate page
4885 along with today's date.
4886 For other types of documents, the title
4887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4894 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4898 \begin_layout Standard
4900 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4914 Here's how you use them:
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 Put the title of your document in the
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 Put the author name in the
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4935 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4941 Note that using this environment is optional.
4942 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4943 will automatically insert today's date.
4944 If you don't want a date, use the option
4946 Suppress default date on front page
4950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 \begin_inset space ~
4961 \begin_layout Standard
4962 You can use footnotes to insert
4963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4970 or contact information.
4973 \begin_layout Subsection
4975 \begin_inset Index idx
4978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4987 name "subsec:Headings"
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4997 takes care of the numbering for you.
5000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5002 \begin_inset Index idx
5005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5006 Section headings ! Numbered
5014 \begin_layout Standard
5015 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5019 \begin_layout Enumerate
5025 \begin_layout Enumerate
5031 \begin_layout Enumerate
5037 \begin_layout Enumerate
5043 \begin_layout Enumerate
5049 \begin_layout Enumerate
5055 \begin_layout Enumerate
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5063 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5064 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5065 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5068 \begin_layout Standard
5069 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5070 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5071 You group the book into chapters.
5073 does a similar grouping:
5076 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 is divided into either
5092 \begin_layout Itemize
5104 \begin_layout Itemize
5116 \begin_layout Itemize
5128 \begin_layout Itemize
5140 \begin_layout Itemize
5152 \begin_layout Standard
5153 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5161 Not all document types use the
5165 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5170 is the top-level heading.
5178 \begin_layout Standard
5183 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5184 labels it with its number,
5185 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5187 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5201 \begin_inset Index idx
5204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5205 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5213 \begin_layout Standard
5214 The unnumbered section headings have a
5215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5222 at the end of their name.
5223 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5224 the table of contents, see section
5225 \begin_inset space ~
5229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5238 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5239 Changing the Numbering
5240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5242 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5249 \begin_layout Standard
5250 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5251 in the Table of Contents.
5252 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5254 Just as certain classes start with
5268 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5278 This is something you can change.
5281 \begin_layout Standard
5284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5288 \begin_inset Index idx
5291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5300 \begin_inset space ~
5304 \begin_inset space ~
5309 you will see two counters.
5314 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5315 numbers a section heading.
5316 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5320 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5321 Short Titles of Headings
5322 \begin_inset Index idx
5325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5326 Section headings ! Short titles
5332 \begin_inset Argument 1
5335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5344 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5351 \begin_layout Standard
5352 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5353 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5354 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5355 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5358 \begin_layout Standard
5360 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5361 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5362 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5363 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5368 \begin_inset space ~
5374 This will insert a box labeled
5375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5379 \begin_inset space ~
5383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5386 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5387 This also works for captions inside floats.
5388 There can only be one short title per title.
5391 \begin_layout Standard
5392 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 The following information applies to all section headings:
5403 \begin_layout Itemize
5404 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5419 \begin_layout Subsection
5423 \begin_layout Standard
5425 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5439 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5440 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5441 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5442 the text they contain.
5443 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5451 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5454 \begin_layout Standard
5455 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5464 when you start a new paragraph.
5465 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5469 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5470 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5471 have to change back to the
5475 environment yourself.
5478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5487 \begin_inset Index idx
5490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5499 \begin_layout Standard
5500 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5501 time for the differences.
5510 are identical except for one difference:
5514 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5523 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5526 \begin_layout Standard
5527 Here's an example of the
5540 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5542 See – no indentation!
5546 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5547 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5548 the other paragraph.
5551 \begin_layout Standard
5552 Here's another example, this time in the
5559 \begin_layout Quotation
5565 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5566 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5567 the first line, then
5571 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5575 you were quoting other text.
5578 \begin_layout Quotation
5579 Here's a new paragraph.
5580 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5581 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5584 \begin_layout Standard
5585 As the examples show,
5589 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5590 They should put quotes in the
5595 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5599 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5604 \begin_inset Index idx
5607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5614 \begin_inset Index idx
5617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5638 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5647 Which I did not rehearse!
5651 It could be much worse.
5652 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5654 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5655 indented a bit more than the first.
5656 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5662 \begin_inset Newline newline
5665 And make things look fine
5666 \begin_inset Newline newline
5672 arg "newline-insert newline"
5678 \begin_layout Standard
5683 does not indent both margins.
5684 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5685 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5688 arg "newline-insert newline"
5694 \begin_layout Subsection
5696 \begin_inset Index idx
5699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5715 \begin_layout Standard
5717 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5727 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5737 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 lets you provide your own label.
5739 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5740 describing some general features of all four of them.
5743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5747 \begin_layout Standard
5748 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5750 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5751 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5760 reset the environment to
5764 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5765 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5766 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5770 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5774 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5781 \begin_layout Standard
5782 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5783 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5784 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5786 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5787 you read all of section
5788 \begin_inset space ~
5792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5794 reference "sec:Nesting"
5801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5803 \begin_inset Index idx
5806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5823 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5827 paragraph environment.
5828 It has the following properties:
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5836 \begin_layout Itemize
5838 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5841 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5846 \begin_layout Itemize
5847 The items can have any length.
5849 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5850 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5862 environment inside another
5866 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5870 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5876 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5881 \begin_inset space ~
5885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5887 reference "sec:Nesting"
5891 for a full explanation of nesting.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5905 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5908 \begin_layout Standard
5909 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5910 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5913 \begin_layout Itemize
5914 The label for the first level
5918 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The label for the second level is a dash.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5928 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5932 \begin_layout Itemize
5933 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5937 \begin_layout Itemize
5938 Back out to the third level.
5942 \begin_layout Itemize
5943 Back to the second level.
5947 \begin_layout Itemize
5948 Back to the outermost level.
5951 \begin_layout Standard
5952 These are the default labels for an
5957 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5962 dialog in the submenu
5967 \begin_inset Index idx
5970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5976 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5981 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5982 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5984 \begin_inset space ~
5988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5990 reference "sec:Nesting"
5997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5999 \begin_inset Index idx
6002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6011 name "sec:Enumerate"
6018 \begin_layout Standard
6023 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6024 It has these properties:
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6028 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6032 \begin_layout Enumerate
6033 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6039 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6042 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 environment resets the counter to one.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6065 Items can have any length.
6068 \begin_layout Enumerate
6069 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6081 \begin_layout Standard
6090 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6092 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6093 labels the four different levels in an
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 The first level of an
6105 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6114 \begin_layout Enumerate
6115 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6119 \begin_layout Enumerate
6120 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6129 \begin_layout Enumerate
6130 Back to the third level
6134 \begin_layout Enumerate
6135 Back to the second level.
6139 \begin_layout Enumerate
6140 Back to the outermost level.
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6144 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6148 environment, see section
6149 \begin_inset space ~
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6155 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6160 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6164 \begin_layout Standard
6165 There is more to nesting
6169 environments than we've stated here.
6170 You should read section
6171 \begin_inset space ~
6175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6177 reference "sec:Nesting"
6181 to learn more about nesting.
6184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6186 \begin_inset Index idx
6189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6198 \begin_layout Standard
6199 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6203 list has no fixed label.
6204 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6213 of the first line as the label.
6217 \begin_layout Description
6218 Example: This is an example of the
6225 \begin_layout Standard
6227 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6240 it is meant that the first usage of the
6244 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6246 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6254 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6260 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 \begin_inset space ~
6268 \begin_inset space ~
6272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6274 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6278 for more information.) Here is an example:
6281 \begin_layout Description
6283 \begin_inset space ~
6286 Example: This one shows how to use a
6289 \begin_inset space ~
6301 \begin_layout Description
6302 Usage: You should use the
6306 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6307 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6309 It's not a good idea to use a
6313 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6314 You're better off using
6326 paragraphs into them.
6329 \begin_layout Description
6330 Nesting: You can nest
6334 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6338 \begin_layout Standard
6339 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6340 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6341 them from the first line.
6344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6346 \begin_inset Index idx
6349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6358 \begin_layout Standard
6363 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6364 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6368 \begin_layout Standard
6377 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6379 Here are its properties:
6382 \begin_layout Labeling
6383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6385 \begin_inset space ~
6388 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6397 of each line as the item label.
6402 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6403 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6404 space as described above.
6407 \begin_layout Labeling
6408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6409 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 uses different margins for the item label and the
6411 body of the item text.
6412 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6413 label width plus a little extra space.
6417 \begin_layout Labeling
6418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6420 \begin_inset space ~
6423 width \SpecialChar LyX
6424 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6425 If the label width is larger, the label
6426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6433 into the first line.
6434 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6435 margin of the rest of the item text.
6438 \begin_layout Labeling
6439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6441 \begin_inset space ~
6444 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6449 environment has the same left margin.
6450 \begin_inset Newline newline
6453 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6458 \begin_inset space ~
6463 dialog (toolbar button
6466 arg "layout-paragraph"
6473 \begin_inset space ~
6478 determines the default label width.
6479 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6488 multiple times instead.
6489 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6499 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6507 every time you alter a label in a
6512 \begin_inset Newline newline
6515 The predefined default width is the length of
6516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6524 \begin_inset space ~
6530 \begin_layout Standard
6535 list the same way as the
6539 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6545 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6549 \begin_layout Standard
6554 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6555 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6557 \begin_inset space ~
6561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6563 reference "sec:Nesting"
6567 to learn about nesting.
6570 \begin_layout Standard
6571 There is yet another feature of the
6575 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6576 left-justifies the item labels by
6578 You can use additional
6582 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6583 justifies the item label.
6588 are documented in section
6589 \begin_inset space ~
6593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6595 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6600 Here are some examples:
6603 \begin_layout Labeling
6604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6605 Left The default for
6612 \begin_layout Labeling
6613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6614 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6621 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6624 \begin_layout Labeling
6625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6626 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6630 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6637 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6640 \begin_layout Subsection
6642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6644 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6649 \begin_inset Index idx
6652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 The features described in this section require that the module
6664 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6666 is loaded in the document settings.
6667 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6673 \begin_inset Index idx
6676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6687 Custom Enumerate Lists
6688 \begin_inset Index idx
6691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6692 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6700 \begin_layout Standard
6702 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6708 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6709 There you add the command
6712 \begin_layout Standard
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6733 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6734 Code, look at section
6735 \begin_inset space ~
6739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6741 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6754 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6761 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6762 For capital Roman numerals replace
6774 in the command above.
6775 For Arabic numerals use
6783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6790 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 You can only number 26
6816 \begin_inset space ~
6819 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6827 \begin_layout Standard
6828 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6829 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6832 \begin_layout Standard
6833 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6836 \begin_layout Enumerate
6837 \begin_inset Argument 1
6840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6866 \begin_layout Enumerate
6867 \begin_inset Argument 1
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Enumerate
6898 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_inset Argument 1
6902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate
6927 \begin_inset Argument 1
6930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6957 For this list these commands were used:
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6971 \begin_inset Newline newline
6979 \begin_inset Newline newline
6987 \begin_inset Newline newline
6997 \begin_layout Standard
7004 makes the label emphasized and
7013 \begin_layout Standard
7014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7022 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7023 lists until you change the definition.
7031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7033 \begin_inset Index idx
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7045 \begin_layout Standard
7046 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7049 \begin_layout Enumerate
7050 \begin_inset Argument 1
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_inset Note Note
7075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 goes back to default numbering
7084 \begin_layout Enumerate
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7092 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7097 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7102 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7103 to indicate that it is a resumed
7104 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7105 , but in the output.
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7117 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7126 \begin_layout Standard
7127 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7129 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7130 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7131 of a normal enumeration.
7132 There, insert the command
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7141 \begin_layout Standard
7146 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7150 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 \begin_layout Standard
7159 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 \begin_inset Argument 1
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7182 This enumeration starts at 4
7185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7187 \begin_inset Index idx
7190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7200 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7202 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7205 \begin_layout Itemize
7209 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 with standard spacing
7213 \begin_layout Standard
7214 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7216 Add there the command
7220 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7224 \begin_inset Argument 1
7227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7246 \begin_layout Itemize
7250 \begin_layout Itemize
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7262 \begin_inset Index idx
7265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 For more information see its documentation,
7274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7285 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7287 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7288 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7292 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7295 \begin_layout Enumerate
7296 \begin_inset Argument 1
7299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7320 \begin_layout Enumerate
7321 with negative indentation
7324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7325 Further Customization
7326 \begin_inset Index idx
7329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 Lists ! Customization
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7339 You can also change the style of description lists.
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 changes the description label font, the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7359 \begin_layout Standard
7360 sets the list style.
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 An example where the command
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7379 \begin_layout Description
7381 \begin_inset space ~
7385 \begin_inset Argument 1
7388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7396 itshape, style=nextline
7406 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7407 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7411 \begin_layout Description
7413 \begin_inset space ~
7416 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7417 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7418 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7421 \begin_layout Standard
7422 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7428 \begin_inset Index idx
7431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 For more information see its documentation
7440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7450 \begin_layout Subsection
7452 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7466 \begin_inset space ~
7469 Address: An Overview
7472 \begin_layout Standard
7473 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7474 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7482 \begin_inset space ~
7488 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7489 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7490 gags on the document.
7491 In contrast, you can use the
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7504 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7509 Of course, you're not limited to using
7516 \begin_inset space ~
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7530 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7531 some European academic papers.
7534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7538 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7550 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7551 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7555 \begin_inset space ~
7560 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7561 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7562 Here's an example of each:
7565 \begin_layout Right Address
7567 \begin_inset Newline newline
7571 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 When is it? What is today?
7581 \begin_layout Standard
7585 \begin_inset space ~
7591 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7593 the largest block of text on a single line.
7594 Here's an example of the
7601 \begin_layout Address
7603 \begin_inset Newline newline
7606 Where do I send this
7607 \begin_inset Newline newline
7610 Your post office and country
7613 \begin_layout Standard
7614 As you can see, both
7621 \begin_inset space ~
7626 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7631 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7632 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7638 This makes sense, since
7646 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7647 Thus, you have to use
7654 arg "newline-insert newline"
7659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7660 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 \begin_inset space ~
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7671 ) to start a new line in an
7678 \begin_inset space ~
7686 \begin_layout Subsection
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7691 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7692 or list of references.
7694 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7699 \begin_inset Index idx
7702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7711 \begin_layout Standard
7716 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7717 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7718 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7719 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7733 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7734 The book document classes ignores the
7738 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7742 in a letter document class.
7745 \begin_layout Standard
7750 environment does several things for you.
7751 First, it puts the centered label
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7762 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7763 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7764 the subsequent text.
7765 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7767 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7776 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7777 The new paragraph will still be in the
7782 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7783 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 \begin_inset Float figure
7792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7794 \begin_inset Graphics
7795 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7803 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7808 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7829 \begin_layout Standard
7830 We would love to demonstrate the
7834 environment, but since this document is in the
7835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7842 class, we can't do this.
7843 We inserted it therefore as figure
7844 \begin_inset space ~
7848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7850 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7855 If you have never heard of an
7856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7863 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7868 \begin_inset Index idx
7871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7880 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7887 \begin_layout Standard
7892 environment is used to list references.
7893 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7894 only use it at the end of the document.
7906 \begin_layout Standard
7907 When you first open a
7911 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7912 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7928 depending on the document class.
7929 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7930 Each paragraph of the
7934 environment is a bibliography entry.
7939 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7940 Each new paragraph is still in the
7947 \begin_layout Standard
7948 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7949 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7951 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7953 handling, have a look at section
7954 \begin_inset space ~
7958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7960 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7967 \begin_layout Subsection
7968 Special Environments
7971 \begin_layout Standard
7973 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7974 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7982 \begin_inset Index idx
7985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7995 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8002 \begin_layout Standard
8008 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8010 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8015 key as a fixed whitespace.
8019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8032 \begin_inset space ~
8037 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8055 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8058 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8061 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8079 So, when you finish using the
8084 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8085 Also, you can nest the
8090 environment inside of others.
8093 \begin_layout Standard
8094 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8097 \begin_layout Itemize
8101 arg "newline-insert newline"
8104 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8109 \begin_inset space \space{}
8119 arg "newline-insert newline"
8125 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 arg "newline-insert newline"
8139 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8145 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8147 You must put at least one
8151 in any line you want blank.
8152 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8161 since that will insert
8166 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8169 arg "self-insert \""
8175 \begin_layout Standard
8179 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 printf("Hello World!
8201 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8205 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8210 This is just the standard
8211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8228 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8230 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8231 as if you used a typewriter.
8232 \begin_inset Index idx
8235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8236 Paragraph environments|)
8241 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8244 Program Code Listings
8249 \begin_inset space ~
8257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8261 \begin_inset Index idx
8264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8273 \begin_layout Standard
8278 environment is similar to the
8283 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8284 computer console text.
8289 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8303 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8304 you can have empty lines.
8317 \begin_layout Itemize
8318 have a certain language and a text style
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8323 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8324 and \SpecialChar TeX
8328 \begin_layout Standard
8329 Because of these properties
8333 works like a typewriter.
8337 \begin_layout Verbatim
8341 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 The following 2 lines are empty:
8347 \begin_layout Verbatim
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8366 environment is identical to
8370 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8371 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8378 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8382 \begin_layout Section
8383 Nesting Environments
8384 \begin_inset Index idx
8387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8388 Nesting ! Environments
8394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8403 \begin_layout Subsection
8407 \begin_layout Standard
8409 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8411 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8413 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8415 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8427 \begin_layout Enumerate
8431 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8440 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8449 \begin_layout Standard
8450 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8451 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8453 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8455 \begin_inset space ~
8459 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset space ~
8476 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8478 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8481 arg "depth-increment"
8487 arg "depth-decrement"
8501 arg "depth-increment"
8507 arg "depth-decrement"
8511 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8512 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8516 \begin_layout Standard
8517 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8518 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8519 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8520 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8521 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8524 \begin_layout Standard
8525 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8527 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8529 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8532 \begin_layout Subsection
8533 What You Can and Can't Nest
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8538 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8543 than a simple yes or no.
8544 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 Completely unnestable
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8561 \begin_layout Standard
8562 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8563 environments have them:
8566 \begin_layout Description
8567 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8568 Can't nest into them.
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8603 \begin_layout Description
8605 \begin_inset space ~
8608 Nestable You can nest them.
8609 You can nest other things into them.
8613 \begin_layout Itemize
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8675 \begin_layout Description
8676 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8677 You can't nest anything into them.
8681 \begin_layout Itemize
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_inset space ~
8769 \begin_layout Itemize
8776 \begin_layout Standard
8777 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8785 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8795 \begin_inset space ~
8798 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8799 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8800 nested section headings violate this.
8808 \begin_layout Subsection
8809 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8810 \begin_inset Index idx
8813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8814 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8822 \begin_layout Standard
8823 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8824 affected by nesting anyhow.
8828 \begin_layout Itemize
8832 \begin_layout Itemize
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Standard
8842 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8850 Figures and tables in
8854 are not affected by this.
8859 Have a look at section
8860 \begin_inset space ~
8864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8866 reference "sec:Floats"
8870 for more information about
8877 \begin_layout Standard
8879 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8880 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8884 \begin_layout Standard
8885 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8893 of its own, it behaves just like a
8894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8901 paragraph environment.
8902 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8907 Here's an example with a table:
8910 \begin_layout Enumerate
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 This is (a) and it's nested.
8920 \begin_layout Standard
8921 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8927 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset Tabular
8930 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8931 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8932 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9017 \begin_layout Standard
9018 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9025 \begin_layout Enumerate
9027 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9036 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9039 \begin_layout Enumerate
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 This is (a) and it's nested.
9049 \begin_layout Standard
9050 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9056 \begin_layout Standard
9058 \begin_inset Tabular
9059 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9060 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9153 \begin_layout Enumerate
9160 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9176 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 This is (a) and it's nested.
9188 \begin_layout Standard
9189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9195 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset Tabular
9198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9199 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9286 \begin_layout Standard
9287 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9293 \begin_layout Enumerate
9295 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9302 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 \begin_layout Standard
9307 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9313 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9314 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9318 \begin_layout Subsection
9319 Usage and General Features
9322 \begin_layout Standard
9323 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9324 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9333 is the innermost possible depth.
9334 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9337 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 level #1 – outermost
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Itemize
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 \begin_layout Standard
9372 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9373 both of them in the example.
9374 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9384 For example, if we tried to nest another
9389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9396 , we would get errors.
9399 \begin_layout Subsection
9401 \begin_inset Index idx
9404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9413 \begin_layout Standard
9414 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9415 We have several examples of nested environments.
9416 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9421 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9435 \begin_layout Labeling
9436 \labelwidthstring MMM
9437 #2-a This is level #2.
9438 We created it by using
9441 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9447 arg "depth-increment"
9454 \begin_layout Labeling
9455 \labelwidthstring MMM
9456 #3-a This is level #3.
9457 This time, we just enter
9464 arg "depth-increment"
9468 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9472 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9478 arg "depth-increment"
9485 \begin_layout Standard
9490 environment, nested inside of
9491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9499 So, it's at level #4.
9500 We did this by entering
9503 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9509 arg "depth-increment"
9512 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9517 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9533 \begin_layout Standard
9538 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9541 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9547 \begin_layout Labeling
9548 \labelwidthstring MMM
9549 #4-a This is level #4.
9553 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9556 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9561 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9565 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9570 keep nesting things inside
9571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9582 \begin_layout Labeling
9583 \labelwidthstring MMM
9584 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9589 \begin_layout Labeling
9590 \labelwidthstring MMM
9591 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9592 and this is level #6.
9593 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9597 \begin_layout Labeling
9598 \labelwidthstring MMM
9599 #5-b Back to level #5.
9603 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9609 arg "depth-decrement"
9616 \begin_layout Labeling
9617 \labelwidthstring MMM
9621 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9627 arg "depth-decrement"
9630 , we're back at level #4.
9634 \begin_layout Labeling
9635 \labelwidthstring MMM
9636 #3-b Back to level #3.
9637 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9641 \begin_layout Labeling
9642 \labelwidthstring MMM
9643 #2-b Back to level #2.
9648 \begin_layout Labeling
9649 \labelwidthstring MMM
9650 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9651 After this sentence, we will enter
9655 and change the paragraph environment back to
9662 \begin_layout Standard
9663 We could have also used the
9679 environment in place of the
9684 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9688 Example 2: Inheritance
9691 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9692 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9704 arg "depth-increment"
9708 \begin_inset Newline newline
9711 which, we will change to the
9719 \begin_layout Enumerate
9724 environment, at level #2.
9727 \begin_layout Enumerate
9728 Notice how the nested
9732 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9736 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9740 \begin_layout Standard
9741 We ended this example by entering
9746 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9750 and reset the nesting depth by using
9753 arg "depth-decrement"
9759 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9760 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9769 \begin_inset Argument 1
9772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9773 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9782 This is level #1, in an
9786 paragraph environment.
9787 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9791 \begin_layout Enumerate
9796 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9802 arg "depth-increment"
9806 Now, what happens if we nest an
9810 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9811 label be? An asterisk?
9815 \begin_layout Itemize
9825 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9826 So, its label is a bullet.
9827 (We got here by using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9839 , then changing the environment to
9847 \begin_layout Itemize
9848 Here's level #4, produced using
9851 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9857 arg "depth-increment"
9861 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9866 \begin_layout Enumerate
9869 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9874 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9878 , because we are in the
9886 environment (that is, it is an
9901 \begin_layout Enumerate
9906 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9907 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9911 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9915 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9918 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9921 \begin_layout Enumerate
9925 arg "depth-decrement"
9928 to decrease the depth after the next
9931 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9938 \begin_layout Enumerate
9940 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9945 \begin_layout Enumerate
9947 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9948 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9952 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9962 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9967 reset the counter for the label.
9971 \begin_layout Enumerate
9975 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9981 arg "depth-decrement"
9984 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9985 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9986 into the twofold-nested
9994 \begin_layout Enumerate
9995 The same thing happens if we do another
9998 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10004 arg "depth-decrement"
10007 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10010 \begin_layout Standard
10011 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10016 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10027 The number of other
10031 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10038 The same rule applies for the
10042 environment, as well.
10045 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10046 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10049 \begin_layout Enumerate
10050 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10051 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10052 the same detail with how we did it.
10061 \begin_layout Standard
10069 arg "depth-increment"
10076 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10077 the example in parentheses someplace.
10078 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10079 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10080 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10084 \begin_layout Enumerate
10089 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10093 \begin_layout Verse
10094 Now we will add verse.
10095 \begin_inset Newline newline
10098 It will get much worse.
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10109 arg "depth-increment"
10119 \begin_layout Verse
10120 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10121 \begin_inset Newline newline
10124 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10125 \begin_inset Newline newline
10131 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10139 \begin_layout Verse
10140 Here comes a table:
10144 \begin_layout Standard
10145 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10151 \begin_layout Standard
10153 \begin_inset Tabular
10154 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10155 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10156 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10242 \begin_layout Verse
10246 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10256 arg "depth-increment"
10262 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10268 \begin_inset Newline newline
10276 arg "depth-decrement"
10283 \begin_layout Enumerate
10288 : level #1) This is another item.
10289 Note that selecting a
10293 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10294 3 times to put the table inside the
10302 \begin_layout Quotation
10303 We're now ending the
10307 list and changing to
10312 We're still at level #1.
10313 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10314 The next set of paragraphs is a
10315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10322 We will nest both the
10329 \begin_inset space ~
10334 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10338 for the letter body.
10342 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10345 to preserve the depth.
10346 Remember that you need to use
10349 arg "newline-insert newline"
10352 to create multiple lines inside the
10359 \begin_inset space ~
10369 \begin_layout Right Address
10371 \begin_inset Newline newline
10374 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10375 \begin_inset Newline newline
10381 \begin_layout Address
10383 \begin_inset space ~
10389 \begin_layout Quotation
10390 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10394 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10395 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10396 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10397 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10398 as soon as possible.
10399 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10402 \begin_layout Quotation
10403 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10404 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10405 with your order, along with payment.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We thank you again for your patience.
10412 \begin_layout Address
10414 \begin_inset Newline newline
10421 \begin_layout Quotation
10422 That ends that example!
10425 \begin_layout Standard
10426 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10427 gives you a lot of power with just
10429 We could have easily nested an
10450 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10453 \begin_layout Subsection
10455 \begin_inset Index idx
10458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10459 Nesting ! Separation
10465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10467 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10474 \begin_layout Standard
10475 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10477 For example you need two different enumerations:
10480 \begin_layout Enumerate
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10494 \begin_layout Standard
10495 \begin_inset Separator plain
10501 \begin_layout Itemize
10507 \begin_layout Standard
10508 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10514 \begin_layout Enumerate
10518 \begin_layout Enumerate
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Standard
10527 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10528 list item and use the menu
10530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10531 Start New Environment
10534 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10535 ) and behind it the new list.
10538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10539 Start New Parent Environment
10541 only appears if the item is nested.
10542 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10546 \begin_layout Standard
10547 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10548 (red arrow in LyX).
10549 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10550 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10553 \begin_layout Standard
10554 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10557 arg "paragraph-break"
10564 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10567 \begin_layout Section
10568 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10569 \begin_inset Index idx
10572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10581 \begin_layout Standard
10582 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10583 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10585 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10586 be broken at the end of a line.
10587 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10591 \begin_layout Subsection
10593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10595 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10600 \begin_inset Index idx
10603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10612 \begin_layout Standard
10613 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10614 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10615 ) not to break the line at
10617 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10620 \begin_layout Quote
10621 Further documentation is given in section
10622 \begin_inset Newline newline
10626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10628 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10636 \begin_layout Standard
10637 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10652 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10661 A protected space is set with
10663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10664 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10666 \begin_inset space ~
10674 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10680 \begin_layout Subsection
10682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10684 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10689 \begin_inset Index idx
10692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10693 Spacing ! Horizontal
10701 \begin_layout Standard
10702 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10705 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10709 The length units are listed in Appendix
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10716 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10727 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10732 \begin_inset Index idx
10735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10736 Spaces ! Inter-word
10744 \begin_layout Standard
10745 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10746 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10747 at the ends of sentences.
10748 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10749 automatically takes care about this.
10750 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10751 followed by a period; see section
10752 \begin_inset space ~
10756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10758 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10763 To insert a normal space, select
10765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10768 \begin_inset space ~
10776 arg "space-insert normal"
10782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10786 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10791 \begin_inset Index idx
10794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10803 \begin_layout Standard
10805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10812 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10821 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10822 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10823 inside abbreviations:
10826 \begin_layout Quote
10828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10832 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10835 \begin_layout Standard
10836 or between values and units.
10837 Compare for example this:
10838 \begin_inset Newline newline
10842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10846 \begin_inset Newline newline
10849 10 kg (normal space
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10856 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 \begin_inset space ~
10866 arg "space-insert thin"
10872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10876 \begin_layout Standard
10877 You can also insert the following space types:
10880 \begin_layout Description
10882 \begin_inset space ~
10886 \begin_inset space ~
10889 space A line with a
10890 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10894 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10898 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10901 negative thin space between the arrows.
10904 \begin_layout Description
10906 \begin_inset space ~
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10913 space A line with a
10914 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10918 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10922 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10925 negative medium space between the arrows.
10928 \begin_layout Description
10930 \begin_inset space ~
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10937 space A line with a
10938 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10942 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10946 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10949 negative thick space between the arrows.
10952 \begin_layout Description
10954 \begin_inset space ~
10958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10962 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10966 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10970 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10974 \begin_inset space ~
10978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10981 em) space between the arrows.
10984 \begin_layout Description
10986 \begin_inset space ~
10990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10994 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10998 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11002 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11006 \begin_inset space ~
11010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11013 em) space between the arrows.
11016 \begin_layout Description
11018 \begin_inset space ~
11022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11026 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11030 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11034 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11038 \begin_inset space ~
11042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11045 em) space between the arrows.
11048 \begin_layout Description
11050 \begin_inset space ~
11054 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11058 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11063 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11070 cm space between the arrows.
11073 \begin_layout Standard
11075 \begin_inset space ~
11079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11081 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11085 lists the different space sizes.
11088 \begin_layout Standard
11089 \begin_inset Float table
11094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11095 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11100 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11104 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11114 \begin_inset Tabular
11115 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11116 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11117 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11234 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11393 \begin_inset Index idx
11396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11405 \begin_layout Standard
11406 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11407 feature for adding extra space
11408 in a uniform fashion.
11409 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11410 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11411 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11412 equally between themselves.
11415 \begin_layout Standard
11416 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11419 \begin_layout Quote
11421 This is on the left side
11422 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11425 This is on the right
11428 \begin_layout Quote
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11435 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_layout Quote
11444 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11458 \begin_layout Standard
11459 That was an example in the
11465 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11469 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11473 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11476 is one in a standard paragraph.
11477 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11481 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11484 \begin_layout Standard
11485 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11488 \begin_inset space ~
11493 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11496 \begin_layout Standard
11498 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11502 \begin_inset space ~
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11510 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11520 \begin_layout Standard
11522 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11526 \begin_inset space ~
11532 \begin_layout Standard
11534 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11538 \begin_inset space ~
11544 \begin_layout Standard
11546 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11550 \begin_inset space ~
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11562 \begin_inset space ~
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11569 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11577 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11581 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11583 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11584 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11588 option in the space dialog.
11596 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11600 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11605 \begin_inset Index idx
11608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11617 \begin_layout Standard
11618 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11619 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11626 What is correct English?:
11627 \begin_inset Newline newline
11631 \begin_inset Newline newline
11635 \begin_inset space ~
11638 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11639 \begin_inset Newline newline
11643 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11654 \begin_inset Newline newline
11658 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11669 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11675 \begin_layout Standard
11677 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11682 \begin_inset space ~
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11694 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11697 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11701 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11707 \begin_inset space ~
11711 \begin_inset space ~
11715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11718 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11727 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11728 That is why it is named
11729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11737 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11738 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11742 \begin_layout Subsection
11744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11746 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11751 \begin_inset Index idx
11754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 \begin_layout Standard
11764 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11769 \begin_inset space ~
11775 There you find the following sizes:
11778 \begin_layout Standard
11791 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11792 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11797 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11799 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11800 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11802 \begin_inset space ~
11808 \begin_inset Index idx
11811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11812 Document ! Settings
11817 for the paragraph separation.
11818 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11829 \begin_layout Standard
11835 \begin_inset Index idx
11838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11844 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11845 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11850 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11851 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11860 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11869 s are described in section
11870 \begin_inset space ~
11874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11876 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11885 If there are several
11889 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11890 You can therefore use
11894 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11897 \begin_layout Standard
11902 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11903 \begin_inset space ~
11907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11909 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11916 \begin_layout Standard
11917 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11927 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11928 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11940 \begin_layout Subsection
11941 Paragraph Alignment
11942 \begin_inset Index idx
11945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11946 Paragraph ! Alignment
11954 \begin_layout Standard
11955 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11957 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11960 dialog (toolbar button
11963 arg "layout-paragraph"
11967 There are five possibilities:
11970 \begin_layout Itemize
11978 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11984 \begin_layout Itemize
11992 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11998 \begin_layout Itemize
12006 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12012 \begin_layout Itemize
12020 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12026 \begin_layout Itemize
12034 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12040 \begin_layout Standard
12041 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12042 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12043 the left and right margins.
12044 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12047 \begin_layout Standard
12049 This paragraph is right aligned,
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 this one is centered,
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 this one is left aligned.
12062 \begin_layout Subsection
12064 \begin_inset Index idx
12067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12068 Page breaks ! Forced
12074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12076 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12083 \begin_layout Standard
12084 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12085 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12086 force a page break where you want one.
12087 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12088 is good at page breaking.
12089 Only if you use a lot of
12093 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12094 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12097 \begin_layout Standard
12098 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12099 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12103 have to change the page breaking.
12106 \begin_layout Standard
12107 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12109 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 \begin_inset space ~
12120 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12122 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12123 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12125 \begin_inset space ~
12130 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12132 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12133 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12136 \begin_layout Standard
12137 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12138 at the top of a page.
12139 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12141 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12142 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12143 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12147 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12151 to learn more about
12158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12162 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12167 \begin_inset Index idx
12170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12171 Page breaks ! Clear
12179 \begin_layout Standard
12180 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12181 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12182 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12183 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12184 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12187 \begin_layout Standard
12188 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12199 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12202 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 \begin_inset space ~
12208 \begin_inset space ~
12213 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12214 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12217 \begin_layout Subsection
12219 \begin_inset Index idx
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12231 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12238 \begin_layout Standard
12239 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12241 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12244 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12258 arg "newline-insert newline"
12262 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12265 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 \begin_inset space ~
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12279 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12282 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12284 This is useful to avoid
12285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12292 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12295 \begin_layout Standard
12296 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12297 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12299 very good at line breaking.
12300 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12301 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12302 \begin_inset space ~
12306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12308 reference "sec:Quote"
12313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12315 reference "sec:Verse"
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12322 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12329 \begin_layout Subsection
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12333 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12338 \begin_inset Index idx
12341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12350 \begin_layout Standard
12352 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12363 \begin_layout Standard
12367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12368 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12370 \begin_inset space ~
12375 you can insert horizontal lines.
12376 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12377 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12378 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12381 \begin_layout Standard
12383 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12394 \begin_layout Section
12395 Characters and Symbols
12398 \begin_layout Standard
12399 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12400 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12401 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12409 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12413 for information on how this is done.
12416 \begin_layout Standard
12417 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12422 dialog via the menu
12424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12425 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12431 \begin_layout Standard
12432 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12440 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12441 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12443 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12451 \begin_layout Section
12452 Fonts and Text Styles
12453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12455 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12462 \begin_layout Subsection
12464 \begin_inset Index idx
12467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12476 \begin_layout Standard
12477 There are two types of fonts:
12480 \begin_layout Description
12482 \begin_inset space ~
12486 \begin_inset Index idx
12489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12495 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12500 characters) in the font.
12501 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12502 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12503 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12504 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12505 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12506 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12507 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12508 \begin_inset Newline newline
12511 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12512 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12513 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12514 sizes than at small ones.
12515 \begin_inset Newline newline
12529 \begin_inset space ~
12537 \begin_layout Description
12539 \begin_inset space ~
12543 \begin_inset Index idx
12546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12552 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12553 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12554 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12555 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12556 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12557 image manipulation program.
12558 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12559 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12560 \begin_inset space ~
12563 pixels high up to 34
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12567 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12568 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12569 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12571 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12572 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12573 \begin_inset Newline newline
12576 Bitmap fonts are named
12579 \begin_inset space ~
12584 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12587 \begin_layout Standard
12588 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12589 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12590 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12591 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12592 use scalable fonts.
12595 \begin_layout Standard
12596 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12600 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12601 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12602 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12603 font to emphasize text, you use an
12604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12612 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12614 In \SpecialChar LyX
12615 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12619 \begin_layout Subsection
12622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12624 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12631 \begin_layout Standard
12632 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12633 used its own fonts.
12634 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12635 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12640 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12641 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12642 to a word processor.
12643 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12644 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 files are very portable across
12646 different machines.
12647 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12648 has increased a lot
12649 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12652 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12654 \begin_inset space ~
12658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12660 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12665 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12666 code in the document
12667 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12670 \begin_layout Standard
12671 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12672 engines that are also able directly
12673 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12675 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12677 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12679 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12680 that is installed on your system.
12681 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12684 \begin_layout Standard
12685 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12693 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12694 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12702 \begin_layout Subsection
12703 Document Font and Font size
12704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12706 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12711 \begin_inset Index idx
12714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12721 \begin_inset Index idx
12724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 \begin_layout Standard
12734 You can set the document fonts in the
12736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12740 \begin_inset Index idx
12743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12744 Document ! Settings
12754 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12755 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12767 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12769 \begin_inset space ~
12772 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12775 \begin_layout Standard
12780 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12781 This requires that you use
12793 as the output format, i.
12794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12798 \begin_inset space \space{}
12801 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12802 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12803 installed (see section
12804 \begin_inset space ~
12808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12810 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12815 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12817 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12818 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12820 \begin_inset space ~
12823 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12824 cannot determine the family.
12825 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12826 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12829 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12832 \begin_layout Standard
12833 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12834 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12839 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12845 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12846 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12855 \begin_inset space ~
12861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12886 European Computer Modern
12889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12897 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12900 \begin_layout Standard
12905 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12906 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12911 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12914 \begin_inset space ~
12919 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12925 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12926 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12929 \begin_layout Itemize
12933 \begin_inset space ~
12938 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12951 \begin_inset space ~
12956 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12957 community in order to replace
12961 as the default font.
12962 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12963 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12980 One difference is improved kerning.
12988 \begin_layout Itemize
12989 If you do not like the look of
12997 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13018 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13022 serif and typewriter fonts,
13026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13027 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13034 \begin_inset space ~
13043 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13048 \begin_inset space \space{}
13056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13060 \begin_inset space \space{}
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13074 \begin_inset space ~
13084 but you can also select your own.
13085 \begin_inset Newline newline
13088 The differences between roman,
13091 \begin_inset space ~
13100 fonts are explained in section
13101 \begin_inset space ~
13105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13107 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13112 \begin_inset Newline newline
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13123 was originally designed for newspapers.
13124 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13125 into the small newspaper columns.
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13134 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13137 \begin_layout Standard
13138 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13151 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13156 depends on the class you are using.
13157 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13160 \begin_layout Standard
13161 Note that the font size is the
13166 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13167 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13168 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13169 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13178 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13185 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13192 \begin_layout Standard
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13201 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13203 \begin_inset space ~
13206 serif or typewriter.
13211 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13221 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13224 \begin_layout Standard
13229 LaTeX font encoding
13231 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13232 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13238 \begin_inset Index idx
13241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13255 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13260 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13261 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13268 \begin_layout Standard
13269 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13271 Use Old Style Figures
13275 Use True Small Caps
13278 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13281 Use Old Style Figures
13283 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13285 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13293 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13297 Use True Small Caps
13299 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13300 of scaled capitals.
13301 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13302 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13305 \begin_layout Standard
13310 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13311 a font to display the script characters.
13315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13316 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13322 \begin_inset Index idx
13325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13332 So this has no effect for the document language
13348 \begin_layout Standard
13351 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13353 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13354 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13360 \begin_inset Index idx
13363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 packages ! microtype
13373 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13375 outputs en- and em-dashes as ligatures (--, ---) instead of a sigle character.
13378 \begin_layout Standard
13379 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13391 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13396 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13397 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13399 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13401 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13404 dialog, see section
13405 \begin_inset space ~
13409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13411 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13423 \begin_layout Subsection
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13428 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13429 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13431 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13432 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13433 choose a math font in the dialog
13435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13439 \begin_inset Index idx
13442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13443 Document ! Settings
13449 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13450 automatically selects a math font.
13451 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13452 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13472 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13473 document font is available.
13476 \begin_layout Standard
13477 Note that the math font will not be used for
13481 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13487 or by the insertion of the command
13494 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13495 \begin_inset space ~
13499 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13500 while the math characters do not.
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13505 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13508 \begin_inset space ~
13516 \begin_inset space ~
13521 in the document font settings.
13524 \begin_layout Standard
13525 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13526 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13527 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13528 font (in most cases
13529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13535 \begin_inset space ~
13541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13544 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13545 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13553 \begin_inset space ~
13559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13565 \begin_layout Subsection
13566 Using Different Character Styles
13567 \begin_inset Index idx
13570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13577 \begin_inset Index idx
13580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13589 \begin_layout Standard
13590 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13591 automatically changes the character style for certain
13592 paragraph environments.
13594 supports two character styles,
13603 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13607 \begin_layout Standard
13612 style, do one of the following:
13615 \begin_layout Itemize
13616 click on the toolbar button
13625 \begin_layout Itemize
13626 use the key binding
13635 \begin_layout Standard
13636 These commands are all toggles.
13641 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13644 \begin_layout Standard
13645 One typically uses the
13649 style for proper names.
13651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13658 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13666 \begin_layout Standard
13667 A more widely used character style is the
13672 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13679 \begin_layout Itemize
13680 clicking on the toolbar button
13689 \begin_layout Itemize
13690 using the keybindings
13699 \begin_layout Standard
13704 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13706 use a different font.
13709 \begin_layout Standard
13710 We've been using the
13714 style all over the place in this document.
13715 Here's one more example:
13718 \begin_layout Quotation
13721 Do not overuse character styles!
13724 \begin_layout Standard
13725 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13726 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13727 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13728 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13732 \begin_layout Standard
13733 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13741 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13743 \begin_inset space ~
13746 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13752 arg "dialog-show character"
13758 \begin_layout Subsection
13759 Fine-Tuning with the
13764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13766 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13771 \begin_inset Index idx
13774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13783 \begin_layout Standard
13784 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13786 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13787 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13788 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13789 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13790 from ordinary dialog.
13793 \begin_layout Standard
13794 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13795 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13796 \begin_inset Newline newline
13799 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13800 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13803 \begin_layout Standard
13804 To use custom character styles, open the
13806 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13808 \begin_inset space ~
13811 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13814 dialog or press the toolbar button
13817 arg "dialog-show character"
13821 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13822 font property that you can choose.
13823 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13826 \begin_inset space ~
13831 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13836 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13837 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13838 environments all at once.
13841 \begin_layout Standard
13842 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13845 \begin_inset space ~
13857 \begin_layout Labeling
13858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13872 The possible options are:
13876 \begin_layout Labeling
13877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13882 This is the Roman font family.
13883 Normally a serif font.
13884 It's also the default family.
13894 \begin_layout Labeling
13895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13899 \begin_inset space ~
13906 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13918 \begin_layout Labeling
13919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13926 This is the Typewriter font family.
13932 arg "font-typewriter"
13941 \begin_layout Labeling
13942 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13947 This corresponds to the print weight.
13952 \begin_layout Labeling
13953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13958 This is the Medium font series.
13959 It's also the default series.
13962 \begin_layout Labeling
13963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13970 This is the Bold font series.
13983 \begin_layout Labeling
13984 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13989 As the name implies.
13994 \begin_layout Labeling
13995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14000 This is the Upright font shape.
14001 It's also the default shape.
14004 \begin_layout Labeling
14005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14019 s the Italic font shape
14025 \begin_layout Labeling
14026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14033 This is the Slanted font shape
14035 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14036 , this is different from italic).
14039 \begin_layout Labeling
14040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14044 \begin_inset space ~
14051 This is the Small caps font shape
14058 \begin_layout Labeling
14059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14064 Alters the text color.
14065 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14069 \begin_inset space ~
14074 , which means that the document default color set in
14076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14077 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14083 \begin_inset space ~
14088 is used, you can choose between
14165 \begin_inset Index idx
14168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14177 \begin_layout Labeling
14178 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14183 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14184 the language of the document.
14185 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14186 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14188 \begin_inset Newline newline
14191 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14193 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14194 When using the spell checking (see section
14195 \begin_inset space ~
14199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14201 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14205 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14208 \begin_layout Labeling
14209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14214 Alters the size of the font.
14215 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14216 proportional to the document font size.
14217 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14218 the details, but a general description of what
14224 \begin_layout Labeling
14225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14246 arg "font-size tiny"
14252 \begin_layout Labeling
14253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14280 \begin_layout Labeling
14281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14302 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14308 \begin_layout Labeling
14309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14330 arg "font-size small"
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14351 It's also the default size.
14355 arg "font-size normal"
14361 \begin_layout Labeling
14362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14383 arg "font-size large"
14389 \begin_layout Labeling
14390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14411 arg "font-size larger"
14417 \begin_layout Labeling
14418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 arg "font-size largest"
14445 \begin_layout Labeling
14446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14467 arg "font-size huge"
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 arg "font-size giant"
14501 \begin_layout Labeling
14502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14507 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14527 arg "font-size increase"
14533 \begin_layout Labeling
14534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14539 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14559 arg "font-size decrease"
14566 \begin_layout Standard
14571 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14572 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14574 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14575 — use those instead.
14576 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14579 \begin_layout Labeling
14580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14585 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14598 This is text with emphasize on
14601 This might seem like the same as
14605 , but it is actually a bit different.
14611 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14613 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14616 \begin_layout Labeling
14617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14624 This is text with Underbar on.
14630 arg "font-underline"
14636 \begin_inset Newline newline
14641 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14642 when you could not change fonts.
14643 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14644 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14645 because some people
14649 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14652 \begin_layout Labeling
14653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14657 \begin_inset space ~
14664 This is text with Double underbar on.
14670 arg "font-underunderline"
14674 \begin_inset Newline newline
14677 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14678 about double underbar.
14681 \begin_layout Labeling
14682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14686 \begin_inset space ~
14693 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14699 arg "font-underwave"
14703 \begin_inset Newline newline
14706 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14707 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14710 \begin_layout Labeling
14711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14715 \begin_inset space ~
14722 This is text with Strikeout on.
14728 arg "font-strikeout"
14732 \begin_inset Newline newline
14735 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14736 changed in the meantime.
14739 \begin_layout Labeling
14740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14744 \begin_inset space ~
14751 This is text with Cross out on.
14754 \begin_inset Newline newline
14757 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14760 \begin_layout Labeling
14761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14768 This is text with Noun on.
14775 , this is a logical attribute.
14776 Normally it's equivalent to
14779 \begin_inset space ~
14788 \begin_layout Standard
14789 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14790 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14792 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14794 \begin_inset space ~
14797 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14803 arg "dialog-show character"
14806 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14807 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14810 arg "textstyle-apply"
14814 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14818 \begin_layout Standard
14819 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14826 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14827 (suppose you just set the shape to
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14846 \begin_inset space ~
14858 \begin_layout Standard
14859 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14879 \begin_layout Itemize
14885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14892 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Newline newline
14914 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14928 \begin_inset Note Note
14931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14932 For more on phantoms see section
14933 \begin_inset space ~
14937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14939 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14949 \begin_inset Newline newline
14955 \begin_layout Itemize
14960 fonts use characters with serifs.
14961 These are the small
14962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14969 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14970 The following example shows the difference:
14971 \begin_inset Newline newline
14975 \begin_inset Newline newline
14980 text without serifs
14983 \begin_inset Newline newline
14986 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14987 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14994 \begin_layout Itemize
14999 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15000 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15001 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15004 \begin_layout Standard
15005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15012 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15013 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15016 \begin_inset space ~
15021 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15022 the property to be removed.
15023 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15024 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15025 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15044 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15052 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15056 \begin_inset space ~
15061 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15072 If you, for example, set
15073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15091 \begin_inset space ~
15096 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15108 \begin_layout Standard
15109 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15110 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15113 \begin_layout Section
15114 Printing and Previewing
15117 \begin_layout Subsection
15121 \begin_layout Standard
15122 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15123 using \SpecialChar LyX
15124 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15125 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15126 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15127 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15129 Additional Features
15134 \begin_layout Standard
15136 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15139 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15140 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15141 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15144 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15145 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15146 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15147 to turn your writing into printable output.
15148 This happens in two stages:
15151 \begin_layout Enumerate
15152 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15153 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15155 a file with the extension,
15156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15170 \begin_layout Enumerate
15171 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15172 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15173 to use the commands in the
15177 file to produce printable output.
15180 \begin_layout Subsection
15181 Output file formats
15182 \begin_inset Index idx
15185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15194 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15202 Simple text (ASCII)
15203 \begin_inset Index idx
15206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15207 File formats ! ASCII
15215 \begin_layout Standard
15216 This file type has the extension
15217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15229 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15233 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15240 \begin_layout Standard
15241 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15243 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15244 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15246 \begin_inset space ~
15252 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15253 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15254 bibliography (section
15255 \begin_inset space ~
15259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15261 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15266 If your document includes such material, use
15268 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15269 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15271 \begin_inset space ~
15275 \begin_inset space ~
15279 \begin_inset space ~
15287 \begin_inset space ~
15291 \begin_inset space ~
15297 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15298 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15304 \begin_inset Index idx
15307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15308 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15317 \begin_layout Standard
15318 This file type has the extension
15319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15330 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15333 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15334 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15335 -Errors or to process it manually
15336 with console commands.
15337 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15338 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15339 's temporary directory whenever you
15340 view or export your document.
15343 \begin_layout Standard
15344 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15345 -file using the menu
15347 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15348 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15352 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15353 export variants are explained in section
15354 \begin_inset space ~
15358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15360 reference "subsec:Export"
15367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15369 \begin_inset Index idx
15372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 This file type has the extension
15383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15403 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15404 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15405 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15409 \begin_layout Standard
15410 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15411 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15412 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15413 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15414 when you view the DVI.
15415 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15418 \begin_layout Standard
15419 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15421 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15422 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15427 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15428 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15430 \begin_inset space ~
15436 The latter option uses the program
15438 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15444 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15447 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15448 font access (see section
15449 \begin_inset space ~
15453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15455 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15460 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15461 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15468 \begin_inset Index idx
15471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15472 File formats ! PostScript
15480 \begin_layout Standard
15481 This file type has the extension
15482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15494 PostScript was developed by the company
15498 as a printer language.
15499 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15501 PostScript can be seen as a
15502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15505 programming language
15506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15509 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15514 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15521 \begin_inset Index idx
15524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15526 packages ! pstricks
15536 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15539 \begin_layout Standard
15540 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15544 Encapsulated PostScript
15545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15548 (EPS, file extension
15549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15561 As \SpecialChar LyX
15562 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15563 convert them in the background to EPS.
15564 If, for example, you have 50
15565 \begin_inset space ~
15568 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15570 \begin_inset space ~
15573 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15574 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15576 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15577 EPS to avoid this problem.
15580 \begin_layout Standard
15581 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15583 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15584 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15592 \begin_inset Index idx
15595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15602 \begin_inset Index idx
15605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15614 \begin_layout Standard
15615 This file type has the extension
15616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15632 Portable Document Format
15633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15640 was derived from PostScript.
15641 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15650 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15651 looks exactly the same.
15654 \begin_layout Standard
15655 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15659 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15663 (JPG, file extension
15664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15691 Portable Network Graphics
15692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15695 (PNG, file extension
15696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15708 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15709 converts them in the
15710 background to one of these formats.
15711 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15712 will slow down your workflow.
15713 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15716 \begin_layout Standard
15717 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15719 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15725 \begin_layout Description
15727 \begin_inset space ~
15730 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15734 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15737 \begin_layout Description
15739 \begin_inset space ~
15746 ) This uses the program
15748 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15751 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15754 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15757 is a new engine, derived from
15761 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15762 access (see section
15763 \begin_inset space ~
15767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15769 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15774 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15775 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15780 \begin_layout Description
15782 \begin_inset space ~
15789 ) This uses the program
15794 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15800 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15801 font access (see section
15802 \begin_inset space ~
15806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15808 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15813 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15814 vertically written Japanese.
15817 \begin_layout Description
15819 \begin_inset space ~
15822 (cropped) This is the same as
15825 \begin_inset space ~
15830 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15831 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15832 to generate good-looking
15833 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15836 \begin_layout Description
15838 \begin_inset space ~
15841 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15845 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15849 \begin_layout Description
15851 \begin_inset space ~
15854 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15858 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15859 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15863 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15864 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15867 \begin_layout Standard
15871 \begin_inset space ~
15880 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15881 works without problems.
15882 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15883 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15887 \begin_inset space ~
15895 \begin_inset space ~
15900 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15910 \begin_inset Index idx
15913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15914 FileFormats ! XHTML
15920 \begin_inset Index idx
15923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15932 \begin_layout Standard
15933 This file type has the extension
15934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15946 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15947 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15948 When \SpecialChar LyX
15949 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15950 suitable for the purpose.
15951 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15957 between different formats, which are described in section
15959 Math Output in XHTML
15964 \begin_inset space ~
15972 \begin_layout Standard
15973 XHTML output remains
15974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15981 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15982 features are supported yet.
15986 and the World Wide Web
15990 Additional Features
15992 manual, for more information.
15995 \begin_layout Standard
15996 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15998 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15999 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16005 \begin_layout Subsection
16007 \begin_inset Index idx
16010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16019 \begin_layout Standard
16020 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16021 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16030 or use the toolbar button
16037 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16038 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16039 \begin_inset space ~
16043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16045 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16049 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16051 \begin_inset space ~
16055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16057 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16062 Further output formats can be selected via
16064 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16065 View (Other Formats)
16067 or the toolbar button
16076 \begin_layout Standard
16077 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16078 viewer window using the menu
16080 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16086 Update (Other Formats)
16091 \begin_layout Standard
16092 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16095 To have a real output, export your document.
16098 \begin_layout Section
16099 A few Words about Typography
16100 \begin_inset Index idx
16103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16112 \begin_layout Subsection
16113 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16114 \begin_inset Index idx
16117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16124 \begin_inset Index idx
16127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16136 \begin_layout Standard
16137 In \SpecialChar LyX
16139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16150 symbol comes in four variants: the
16167 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16173 \begin_layout Standard
16174 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16184 height_special "totalheight"
16189 backgroundcolor "none"
16192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16193 \begin_inset Tabular
16194 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16195 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16196 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16197 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16198 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16199 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16228 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16268 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16291 system key combination
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16308 and the em dash with
16311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16324 is the Mac label for the right
16333 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16337 \begin_inset space ~
16340 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16352 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16353 and 2014 for the en dash).
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16372 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16395 system key combination or
16396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16423 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16462 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16468 \begin_layout Standard
16469 Dashes can also be inserted with
16471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16473 \begin_inset space ~
16476 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16491 \begin_layout Standard
16492 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16493 mode and has a length of its own.
16494 Here are some examples:
16497 \begin_layout Enumerate
16498 line- and page-breaks
16499 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16509 \begin_layout Enumerate
16511 \begin_inset space ~
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16552 \begin_layout Standard
16554 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16556 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16557 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16565 \begin_layout Subsection
16566 Dashes and Line Breaks
16567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16569 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16576 \begin_layout Standard
16577 Whether line breaks at dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale:
16580 \begin_layout Itemize
16581 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash in ranges of
16582 values such as 1975–1982, but no line break should occur if only a single
16583 character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16586 \begin_layout Itemize
16587 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16591 \begin_layout Itemize
16592 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16593 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16596 \begin_layout Standard
16597 The dashes that are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16598 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16599 by default generally allow for line breaks
16600 after en-dashes and em-dashes.
16603 \begin_layout Standard
16607 \begin_layout Enumerate
16608 Unwanted line breaks can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16615 Prevent Hyphenation
16620 \begin_inset space ~
16630 , using protected spaces or preceding with
16636 in \SpecialChar TeX
16642 \begin_layout Itemize
16644 \begin_inset space ~
16648 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16658 height_special "totalheight"
16663 backgroundcolor "none"
16666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16675 \begin_layout Itemize
16676 With spaced en dashes
16677 \begin_inset space ~
16681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16685 in British English and generally recommended by
16687 The Elements of Typographic Style
16690 \begin_inset space ~
16693 – line breaks should not occur before the dash.
16696 \begin_layout Itemize
16700 \begin_inset space ~
16703 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16704 \begin_inset space ~
16707 – sont très utiles.
16710 \begin_layout Itemize
16717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16726 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16729 \begin_layout Standard
16730 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16731 \begin_inset space ~
16734 – in contrast to an overfull line
16735 \begin_inset space ~
16738 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16743 \begin_layout Enumerate
16744 The default dashes output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16745 disable hyphenation in words adjacent to hyphens
16746 and ligature dashes.
16749 \begin_layout Standard
16750 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
16753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16754 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16755 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16756 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16759 In this case optional line breaks after individual
16763 can be re-allowed via the menu
16765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16767 Optional line break
16772 \begin_layout Itemize
16773 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16774 as common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16779 \begin_layout Standard
16780 Note: Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16782 \begin_inset space ~
16785 2.1, you could insert en-dashes and em-dashes as -- and ---, respectively;
16786 they were automatically merged to proper (breakable) dashes in the output,
16787 but kept as consecutive hyphen characters in the LyX document.
16788 If you inserted literal dash characters, however, they were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16794 dashes (this was actually rather by accident than intentionally, but some
16795 used these two forms of dashes deliberately).
16796 As of \SpecialChar LyX
16798 \begin_inset space ~
16801 2.2, things work differently: consecutive hyphens are merged to dashes immediatel
16806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16807 The behavior was changed since it led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16809 HTML export and the PDF export.
16814 If you copy consecutive hyphens, by contrast, they are output as consecutive
16816 An unintended consequence of this change was that all dashes now were output
16817 as non-breakable dashes.
16818 Since furthermore, in order to maintain the output, occurrences of consecutive
16819 hyphens in documents that were saved by \SpecialChar LyX
16821 \begin_inset space ~
16824 2.1 or earlier versions, were converted to literal en- and em-dash characters,
16825 respectively, these were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16826 in \SpecialChar LyX
16828 \begin_inset space ~
16836 An obvious drawback of all this was that it resulted in different line
16837 breaks in some documents.
16840 \begin_inset space ~
16843 2.3, by contrast and as outlined above, outputs
16847 dashes by default, so if you load a document saved previous to LyX 2.2,
16848 you should get the identical output with LyX 2.3 for the dashes inserted
16850 Furthermore, \SpecialChar LyX
16852 \begin_inset space ~
16855 2.3 provides the aforementioned option
16857 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16862 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16866 It is off by default but selected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16868 \begin_inset space ~
16871 2.2 in order to maintain line breaking between \SpecialChar LyX
16872 2.2 and 2.3 (so these document
16873 have non-breakable dashes).
16874 \begin_inset Newline newline
16877 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16881 \begin_layout Itemize
16882 If you used only literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16884 \begin_inset space ~
16887 2.2 documents, you must manually select
16889 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16891 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16895 \begin_layout Itemize
16896 If you used both literal and --/--- dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16898 \begin_inset space ~
16901 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16902 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
16905 \begin_layout Itemize
16906 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16907 documents that follow literal
16908 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16910 \begin_inset space ~
16914 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16915 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16917 \begin_inset space ~
16920 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16923 \begin_layout Subsection
16925 \begin_inset Index idx
16928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16937 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16944 \begin_layout Standard
16945 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16946 but automatically in the output.
16947 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16953 \begin_inset Index idx
16956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16963 following the rules of the document language.
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16968 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16972 font and with unusual constructs, like
16973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16981 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16982 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16983 This is done with the menu
16985 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16986 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16988 \begin_inset space ~
16994 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16996 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17000 \begin_layout Standard
17001 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17002 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17013 would then see the hyphen
17014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17021 as a hyphenation possibility.
17022 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17023 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17027 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17030 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17032 Prevent Hyphenation
17037 \begin_inset space ~
17045 \begin_layout Subsection
17047 \begin_inset Index idx
17050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17060 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17063 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17070 \begin_layout Standard
17071 When \SpecialChar LyX
17072 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17073 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17075 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17081 appropriate amount of space.
17082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17085 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17087 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17088 gets after another word.
17091 \begin_layout Standard
17092 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17093 not work in all cases.
17095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17106 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17107 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17110 \begin_layout Standard
17111 Here are some examples of
17115 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17118 \begin_layout Itemize
17123 \begin_layout Itemize
17128 \begin_layout Standard
17129 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17132 \begin_layout Itemize
17134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17138 this is too much space!
17141 \begin_layout Itemize
17146 \begin_layout Standard
17147 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17150 \begin_layout Standard
17151 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17154 \begin_layout Enumerate
17158 \begin_inset space ~
17163 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17164 \begin_inset space ~
17168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17170 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17175 \begin_inset Index idx
17178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17179 Spaces ! inter-word
17187 \begin_layout Enumerate
17191 \begin_inset space ~
17196 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17197 \begin_inset space ~
17201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17203 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17208 \begin_inset Index idx
17211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17220 \begin_layout Enumerate
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17232 \begin_inset space ~
17239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17241 \begin_inset space ~
17246 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17247 This function is also bound to
17250 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17256 \begin_layout Standard
17257 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17260 \begin_layout Itemize
17262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17266 \begin_inset space \space{}
17269 this is too much space!
17272 \begin_layout Itemize
17273 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17277 \begin_layout Standard
17278 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17279 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17281 will take care of this.
17284 \begin_layout Standard
17285 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17289 \begin_inset space ~
17295 feature described in the section
17297 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17302 Additional Features
17307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17309 \begin_inset Index idx
17312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17313 Typography ! Quotation marks
17319 \begin_inset Index idx
17322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17323 Quotation marks | see
17327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17353 \begin_layout Standard
17355 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17356 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17357 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17367 The keyboard character,
17371 , generates this automatically.
17374 \begin_layout Standard
17375 You can specify what character the
17379 key produces by using the submenu
17385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17389 \begin_inset Index idx
17392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17393 Document ! Settings
17398 dialog and switching the
17402 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17403 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17405 \begin_inset space ~
17411 \begin_layout Labeling
17412 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17424 \begin_inset space ~
17428 \begin_inset space ~
17432 \begin_inset Quotes els
17436 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17450 \begin_inset Quotes els
17454 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17457 quotation marks (as common, e.
17458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17464 \begin_layout Labeling
17465 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17468 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17472 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17476 \begin_inset space ~
17480 \begin_inset space ~
17484 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17488 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17494 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17498 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17502 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17506 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17509 quotation marks (as common, e.
17510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17516 \begin_layout Labeling
17517 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17520 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17524 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17532 \begin_inset space ~
17536 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17540 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17546 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17550 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17554 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17558 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17561 quotation marks (as common, e.
17562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17568 \begin_layout Labeling
17569 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17572 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17576 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17580 \begin_inset space ~
17584 \begin_inset space ~
17588 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17592 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17598 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17602 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17606 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17610 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17613 quotation marks (as common, e.
17614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17620 \begin_layout Labeling
17621 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17624 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17628 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17632 \begin_inset space ~
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17644 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17650 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17654 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17658 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17662 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17665 quotation marks (as common, e.
17666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17669 g., in Switzerland)
17672 \begin_layout Labeling
17673 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17676 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17680 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17684 \begin_inset space ~
17688 \begin_inset space ~
17692 \begin_inset Quotes als
17696 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17702 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17706 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17710 \begin_inset Quotes als
17714 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17717 quotation marks (as common, e.
17718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17724 \begin_layout Labeling
17725 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17728 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17732 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17736 \begin_inset space ~
17740 \begin_inset space ~
17744 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17748 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17754 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17758 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17762 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17766 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17769 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17772 \begin_layout Labeling
17773 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17776 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17780 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17784 \begin_inset space ~
17788 \begin_inset space ~
17792 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17796 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17802 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17806 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17810 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17814 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17817 quotation marks (as common, e.
17818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17821 g., in Great Britain)
17824 \begin_layout Labeling
17825 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17828 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17836 \begin_inset space ~
17840 \begin_inset space ~
17844 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17848 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17854 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17858 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17862 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17866 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17869 quotation marks (as common, e.
17870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17876 \begin_layout Labeling
17877 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17880 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17884 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17888 \begin_inset space ~
17892 \begin_inset space ~
17896 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17900 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17906 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17910 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17914 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17918 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17921 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17926 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17927 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17928 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17929 the inner marks differ).
17937 \begin_layout Labeling
17938 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17941 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17945 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17949 \begin_inset space ~
17953 \begin_inset space ~
17957 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17961 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17967 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17971 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17975 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17979 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17982 quotation marks (as common, e.
17983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17989 \begin_layout Labeling
17990 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17993 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17997 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18001 \begin_inset space ~
18005 \begin_inset space ~
18009 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18013 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18019 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18023 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18027 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18031 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18034 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18037 \begin_layout Labeling
18038 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18039 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18047 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18053 \begin_inset space ~
18057 \begin_inset space ~
18063 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18071 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18075 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18079 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18083 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18087 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18090 quotation marks (as common, e.
18091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18099 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18100 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18108 \begin_layout Labeling
18109 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18110 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18118 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18124 \begin_inset space ~
18128 \begin_inset space ~
18134 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18142 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18146 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18150 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18154 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18158 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18161 quotation marks (as common, e.
18162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18165 g., in North Korea and China)
18169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18170 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18171 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18179 \begin_layout Standard
18180 Inner quotation marks
18184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18186 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18187 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18195 does not necessarily mean
18196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18204 This is why we call them
18205 \begin_inset Quotes els
18209 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18225 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18227 \begin_inset Quotes els
18231 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18234 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18237 arg "quote-insert inner"
18242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18248 \begin_layout Standard
18249 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18250 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18251 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18252 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18253 If you check the setting
18255 Use dynamic quotation marks
18259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18260 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18263 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18264 they appear in a special color).
18265 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18266 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18271 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18274 \begin_layout Standard
18275 Individual quotation marks (i.
18276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18279 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18280 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18284 \begin_layout Subsection
18286 \begin_inset Index idx
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18290 Typography ! Ligatures
18296 \begin_inset Index idx
18299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18330 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18337 \begin_layout Standard
18338 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18339 print them as single characters.
18340 These groups are known as
18345 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18346 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18348 Here are the standard ligatures:
18351 \begin_layout Itemize
18355 \begin_layout Itemize
18359 \begin_layout Itemize
18363 \begin_layout Itemize
18367 \begin_layout Itemize
18371 \begin_layout Standard
18372 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18375 \begin_layout Standard
18376 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18377 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18385 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18401 To break a ligature, use
18403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18404 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18406 \begin_inset space ~
18413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18424 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18441 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18449 \begin_layout Subsection
18451 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18453 \begin_inset Index idx
18456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18466 \begin_layout Standard
18469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18470 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18474 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18477 \begin_layout Description
18479 The name of the game.
18482 \begin_layout Description
18484 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18488 \begin_layout Description
18490 The \SpecialChar TeX
18491 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18495 \begin_layout Description
18496 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18497 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18501 \begin_layout Standard
18502 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18508 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18516 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18517 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18518 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18519 converges to the number
18520 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18523 : The actual version is
18524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18532 , the previous one was
18533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18544 \begin_layout Subsection
18546 \begin_inset Index idx
18549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18558 \begin_layout Standard
18559 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18560 space between two words.
18561 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18571 for units use the menu
18573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18574 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18576 \begin_inset space ~
18584 arg "space-insert thin"
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 Here is an example to show the differences:
18594 \begin_layout Standard
18595 \begin_inset Tabular
18596 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18597 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18598 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18599 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18606 \begin_inset space ~
18610 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18622 space between number and unit
18629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18638 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18650 half space between number and unit
18663 \begin_layout Subsection
18665 \begin_inset Index idx
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18677 \begin_layout Standard
18678 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18680 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18681 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18682 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18683 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18684 These bits of text became known as
18695 \begin_layout Standard
18696 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18697 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18698 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18699 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18700 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18701 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18702 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18703 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18704 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18705 \begin_inset Newline newline
18713 \begin_inset Newline newline
18721 \begin_inset Newline newline
18724 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18725 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18726 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18728 \begin_inset space ~
18732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18734 key "latexcompanion"
18740 \begin_inset space ~
18744 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18751 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18752 's page break mechanism.
18755 \begin_layout Chapter
18756 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18759 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18766 \begin_layout Standard
18767 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18770 \begin_inset space ~
18776 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18779 \begin_layout Section
18781 \begin_inset Index idx
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18800 \begin_layout Standard
18802 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18805 \begin_layout Description
18808 \begin_inset space ~
18811 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18812 \begin_inset Newline newline
18816 \begin_inset Note Note
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18828 \begin_layout Description
18829 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18830 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18831 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18834 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18835 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18837 \begin_inset space ~
18843 \begin_inset Newline newline
18847 \begin_inset Note Comment
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18860 \begin_layout Description
18862 \begin_inset space ~
18865 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18866 set in the document settings under
18868 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18870 \begin_inset space ~
18876 \begin_inset Newline newline
18880 \begin_inset Newline newline
18884 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18893 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18894 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18899 of a comment that appears in the output.
18905 \begin_inset Newline newline
18909 \begin_inset Newline newline
18912 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18915 \begin_layout Standard
18916 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18928 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18931 \begin_layout Section
18933 \begin_inset Index idx
18936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18945 name "sec:Footnotes"
18952 \begin_layout Standard
18954 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18960 or the toolbar button
18963 arg "footnote-insert"
18975 \begin_inset Graphics
18976 filename clipart/footnote.png
18985 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18986 's representation of your footnote.
18996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19015 label, the box will
19019 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19020 Clicking on the box label again will close
19033 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19034 and click on the footnote
19049 \begin_layout Standard
19050 Here is an example footnote:
19058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19059 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19067 \begin_layout Standard
19068 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19069 position where the footnote box is placed.
19070 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19071 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19072 according to the document class.
19074 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19075 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19081 ey are described in the
19084 \begin_inset space ~
19092 \begin_layout Section
19094 \begin_inset Index idx
19097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19106 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19113 \begin_layout Standard
19114 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19116 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19120 \begin_inset space ~
19125 or the toolbar button
19128 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19154 appearing within your text.
19155 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19156 's representation of your margin
19165 \begin_layout Standard
19166 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19170 \begin_inset Marginal
19173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19175 This is a marginal note.
19183 \begin_layout Standard
19184 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19185 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19186 pages, right on odd pages.
19189 \begin_layout Standard
19190 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19193 \begin_inset space ~
19201 \begin_inset space ~
19209 \begin_layout Section
19210 Graphics and Images
19211 \begin_inset Index idx
19214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19221 \begin_inset Index idx
19224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19233 name "sec:Graphics"
19240 \begin_layout Standard
19241 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19242 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19245 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19254 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19258 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19263 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19264 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19266 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19267 \begin_inset space ~
19271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19273 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19280 \begin_layout Standard
19285 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19286 of the image in the output.
19287 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19295 \begin_inset space ~
19304 \begin_inset space ~
19308 \begin_inset space ~
19312 \begin_inset space ~
19317 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19318 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19326 \begin_layout Standard
19330 \begin_inset space ~
19334 \begin_inset space ~
19339 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19340 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19342 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19347 \begin_inset space ~
19352 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19353 with the image size is printed.
19356 \begin_layout Standard
19357 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19358 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19360 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19363 \begin_layout Standard
19365 \begin_inset Graphics
19366 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19374 \begin_layout Standard
19375 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19376 the image into a float, see section
19377 \begin_inset space ~
19381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19383 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19390 \begin_layout Subsection
19392 \begin_inset Index idx
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19404 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19411 \begin_layout Standard
19412 You can insert images in any known file format.
19413 But as we explained in section
19414 \begin_inset space ~
19418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19420 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19424 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19426 therefore uses the program
19430 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19431 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19432 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19439 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19446 \begin_layout Standard
19447 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19450 \begin_layout Description
19452 \begin_inset space ~
19455 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19456 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19457 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19461 Graphics Interchange Format
19462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19465 (GIF, file extension
19466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19478 \begin_inset Index idx
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19513 Portable Network Graphics
19514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19517 (PNG, file extension
19518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19530 \begin_inset Index idx
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19565 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19569 (JPG, file extension
19570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19594 \begin_inset Index idx
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 \begin_layout Description
19630 \begin_inset space ~
19633 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19635 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19636 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19637 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19638 \begin_inset Newline newline
19641 Scalable image formats can be
19642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19645 Scalable Vector Graphics
19646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19649 (SVG, file extension
19650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19662 \begin_inset Index idx
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19697 Encapsulated PostScript
19698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19701 (EPS, file extension
19702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19714 \begin_inset Index idx
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19749 Portable Document Format
19750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19753 (PDF, file extension
19754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19766 \begin_inset Index idx
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19784 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19785 result will not be scalable.
19786 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19792 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19800 \begin_layout Standard
19801 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19808 \begin_layout Subsection
19809 Grouping of Image Settings
19810 \begin_inset Index idx
19813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19814 Images ! Settings grouping
19822 \begin_layout Standard
19823 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19825 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19826 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19828 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19829 need to manually change each of them.
19833 \begin_layout Standard
19834 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19837 \begin_inset space ~
19841 \begin_inset space ~
19853 \begin_inset space ~
19857 \begin_inset space ~
19863 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19864 and checking the name of the desired group.
19867 \begin_layout Section
19869 \begin_inset Index idx
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19888 \begin_layout Standard
19889 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19892 arg "tabular-insert"
19897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19901 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19902 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19903 from the rest of the table.
19904 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19905 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19907 Here is an example table:
19910 \begin_layout Standard
19912 \begin_inset Tabular
19913 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19914 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19915 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19916 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19917 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20118 \begin_layout Subsection
20122 \begin_layout Standard
20123 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20126 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20130 This brings up the table dialog.
20131 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20132 cursor is placed currently.
20133 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20134 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20135 done on all of your selection.
20138 \begin_layout Standard
20139 In addition to the table dialog, the
20142 \begin_inset space ~
20147 helps you in setting table properties.
20148 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20151 \begin_layout Standard
20155 \begin_inset space ~
20160 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20161 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20162 current cell respectively.
20163 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20165 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20166 of text, see section
20167 \begin_inset space ~
20171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20173 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20180 \begin_layout Standard
20181 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20182 using the check box
20191 This will merge the cells to
20195 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20196 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20197 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20198 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20199 in the last row without the upper border:
20202 \begin_layout Standard
20204 \begin_inset Tabular
20205 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20206 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20208 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20209 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20210 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 \begin_layout Standard
20342 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20343 -arguments for the table.
20344 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20345 explained in the chapter
20352 \begin_inset space ~
20358 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20359 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20360 but are visible in the output.
20363 \begin_layout Standard
20364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 Most DVI-viewers are
20376 able to display rotations.
20384 \begin_layout Standard
20389 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20394 adds lines for all cell borders.
20397 \begin_layout Subsection
20399 \begin_inset Index idx
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20403 Tables ! Multi-page
20409 \begin_inset Index idx
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 \begin_layout Standard
20422 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20425 \begin_inset space ~
20429 \begin_inset space ~
20437 \begin_inset space ~
20442 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20443 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20446 \begin_layout Description
20451 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20452 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20453 Except for the first page, if
20456 \begin_inset space ~
20464 \begin_layout Description
20468 \begin_inset space ~
20473 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20474 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20477 \begin_layout Description
20482 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20483 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20484 except for the last page, if
20487 \begin_inset space ~
20495 \begin_layout Description
20499 \begin_inset space ~
20504 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20505 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20508 \begin_layout Description
20509 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20510 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20516 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20519 \begin_inset space ~
20527 \begin_layout Standard
20528 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20529 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20530 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20536 In this context, first means first in this order:
20539 \begin_inset space ~
20551 \begin_inset space ~
20556 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20559 \begin_layout Standard
20561 \begin_inset Tabular
20562 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20563 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20564 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20565 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20566 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20567 <row endfirsthead="true">
20568 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20579 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20598 <row endfirsthead="true">
20599 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <row endhead="true">
20632 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20643 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <row endhead="true">
20663 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <row endfoot="true">
20696 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20716 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21688 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21748 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21779 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21841 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21872 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21903 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21934 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21996 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22058 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22089 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22151 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 <row endlastfoot="true">
22678 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22689 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22698 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22715 \begin_layout Subsection
22717 \begin_inset Index idx
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22729 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22736 \begin_layout Standard
22737 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22738 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22739 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22740 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22744 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22747 \begin_layout Standard
22748 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22749 for the column in the table dialog.
22750 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22751 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22755 \begin_layout Standard
22757 \begin_inset Tabular
22758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22759 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22761 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22762 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22782 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22907 This is longer now.
22912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22963 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22964 This is longer now.
22969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 \begin_layout Standard
22996 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22997 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23003 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23009 Selection with the mouse or with
23013 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23014 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23015 the selection from outside the table.
23018 \begin_layout Section
23020 \begin_inset Index idx
23023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23039 \begin_layout Subsection
23043 \begin_layout Standard
23044 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23045 have a fixed location.
23047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23054 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23062 \begin_inset space ~
23067 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23068 too many notes on the current page.
23071 \begin_layout Standard
23072 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23073 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23074 and pages without text.
23075 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23076 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23077 Floats are therefore numbered.
23078 Referencing is described in section
23079 \begin_inset space ~
23083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23085 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23092 \begin_layout Standard
23093 To insert a float, use the menu
23095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23099 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23100 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23102 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23103 \begin_inset Index idx
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23112 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23113 paragraph within the float.
23114 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23115 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23116 left-clicking on the box label.
23117 A closed float box looks like this:
23118 \begin_inset Graphics
23119 filename clipart/float.png
23124 – a gray button with a red label.
23127 \begin_layout Standard
23128 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23130 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23133 \begin_layout Subsection
23135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23137 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23142 \begin_inset Index idx
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 Floats ! Figure floats
23154 \begin_layout Standard
23156 \begin_inset space ~
23160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23162 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23166 was created using the menu
23168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23169 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23175 arg "float-insert figure"
23179 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23188 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23192 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23193 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23195 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23197 \begin_inset space ~
23205 arg "layout-paragraph"
23211 \begin_layout Standard
23212 \begin_inset Float figure
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 \begin_inset Graphics
23220 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23235 name "fig:A-star-in"
23252 \begin_layout Standard
23253 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23254 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23256 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23265 ) and refer to it using the menu
23267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23273 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23277 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23278 vague references like
23279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23286 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23287 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23297 For more about cross-references, see section
23298 \begin_inset space ~
23302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23304 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23311 \begin_layout Standard
23312 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23313 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23314 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23315 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23316 as described in section
23317 \begin_inset space ~
23321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23323 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23329 \begin_inset space ~
23333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23335 reference "fig:Two-images"
23339 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23340 You can also set the images one below the other.
23342 \begin_inset space ~
23346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23348 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23355 reference "fig:Star"
23359 are the subfigures.
23362 \begin_layout Standard
23363 \begin_inset Float figure
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23373 \begin_inset Float figure
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23379 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23384 name "fig:Undefinable"
23396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 \begin_inset Graphics
23398 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23410 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23414 \begin_inset Float figure
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 \begin_inset Graphics
23439 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23463 name "fig:Two-images"
23480 \begin_layout Subsection
23482 \begin_inset Index idx
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 Floats ! Table floats
23494 \begin_layout Standard
23495 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23498 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23501 or the toolbar button
23504 arg "float-insert table"
23508 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23509 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23510 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23512 \begin_inset space ~
23516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23518 reference "tab:Table-float"
23525 \begin_layout Standard
23526 \begin_inset Float table
23531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23537 name "tab:Table-float"
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 \begin_inset Tabular
23552 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23553 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23683 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23704 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23707 \end{array}\right]$
23715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23749 \begin_layout Subsection
23751 \begin_inset Index idx
23754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23763 \begin_layout Standard
23765 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23766 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23767 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23769 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23777 \begin_inset space ~
23785 \begin_layout Section
23787 \begin_inset Index idx
23790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 \begin_layout Standard
23801 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23803 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23804 \begin_inset space \space{}
23811 \begin_layout Standard
23812 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23813 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23819 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23820 and its alignment within the page.
23823 \begin_layout Standard
23825 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23835 height_special "totalheight"
23840 backgroundcolor "none"
23843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 This is a minipage.
23847 The text is set in an italic style.
23850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23854 another formatting.
23862 \begin_layout Standard
23863 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23866 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23870 as described in section
23871 \begin_inset space ~
23875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23882 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23888 \begin_layout Standard
23889 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23899 height_special "totalheight"
23904 backgroundcolor "none"
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23909 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23915 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23919 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23929 height_special "totalheight"
23934 backgroundcolor "none"
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23939 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23947 \begin_layout Standard
23948 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23954 \begin_layout Standard
23955 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23957 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23964 \begin_inset space ~
23972 \begin_layout Chapter
23973 Mathematical Formulas
23974 \begin_inset Index idx
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 \begin_inset Index idx
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24018 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24025 \begin_layout Standard
24026 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24031 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24034 \begin_layout Section
24036 \begin_inset Index idx
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 \begin_layout Standard
24049 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24062 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24064 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24065 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24066 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24074 \begin_layout Standard
24075 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24079 \begin_inset space ~
24084 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24087 \begin_layout Standard
24088 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24089 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24092 \begin_layout Standard
24093 This is a line with an inline formula
24094 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24100 \begin_layout Standard
24101 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24102 paragraph, like this one:
24103 \begin_inset Formula
24110 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24113 \begin_layout Standard
24115 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24117 For example, typing
24118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24131 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24132 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24136 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24139 \begin_inset space ~
24147 \begin_layout Subsection
24148 Navigating in Formulas
24149 \begin_inset Index idx
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 \begin_layout Standard
24162 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24163 achieved with the arrow keys.
24165 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24166 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24171 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24172 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24176 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24180 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24183 \end{array}\right]$
24191 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24196 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24197 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24200 \begin_layout Standard
24205 , printed in this document as
24206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24210 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24217 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24218 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24219 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24224 For example, if you want
24225 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24233 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24243 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24247 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24252 , since in the latter case only the
24255 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24260 will be under the square root sign:
24261 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24267 \begin_layout Standard
24268 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24270 \begin_inset Formula
24272 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24281 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24282 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24285 \begin_layout Subsection
24289 \begin_layout Standard
24290 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24291 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24295 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24296 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24297 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24298 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24299 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24303 \begin_layout Subsection
24304 Exponents and Subscripts
24305 \begin_inset Index idx
24308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 \begin_inset Index idx
24318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 \begin_layout Standard
24328 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24331 arg "math-superscript"
24337 arg "math-subscript"
24340 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24342 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24345 , type in a formula
24348 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24358 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24364 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24368 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24374 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24380 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24389 , you have to use an extra
24393 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24394 For example, if you want
24395 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24401 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24407 Subscripts are similar: To get
24408 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24414 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24422 \begin_layout Subsection
24424 \begin_inset Index idx
24427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24436 \begin_layout Standard
24437 Create a fraction either with the command
24443 or by using the icon
24446 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24452 \begin_inset space ~
24458 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24459 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24460 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24465 To move back up, press
24470 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24471 \begin_inset Formula
24473 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24476 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24484 \begin_layout Subsection
24486 \begin_inset Index idx
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 \begin_layout Standard
24499 Roots can be created using the
24502 \begin_inset space ~
24510 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24516 arg "math-insert \\root"
24538 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24544 always produces a square root.
24547 \begin_layout Subsection
24548 Operators with Limits
24549 \begin_inset Index idx
24552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 \begin_inset Index idx
24562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24571 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24578 \begin_layout Standard
24580 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24584 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24587 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24588 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24589 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24590 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24591 The sum operator will automatically place its
24592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24599 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24601 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24605 \begin_inset Formula
24607 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24612 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24616 \begin_layout Standard
24617 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24619 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24620 behind the operator and using the menu
24622 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24623 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24625 \begin_inset space ~
24629 \begin_inset space ~
24643 \begin_layout Standard
24644 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24653 \begin_inset Index idx
24656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24663 \begin_inset Formula
24665 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24670 which will place the
24671 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24683 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24684 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24690 \begin_layout Standard
24691 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24698 Have a look at section
24699 \begin_inset space ~
24703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24705 reference "subsec:Functions"
24709 for an explanation of function macros.
24712 \begin_layout Subsection
24714 \begin_inset Index idx
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24726 \begin_layout Standard
24727 Most math symbols can be found in the
24730 \begin_inset space ~
24735 under one of several categories; including
24752 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24756 \begin_layout Standard
24757 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24758 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24759 don't have to use the
24762 \begin_inset space ~
24767 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24769 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24772 \begin_layout Subsection
24774 \begin_inset Index idx
24777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24786 \begin_layout Standard
24787 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24793 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24799 \begin_inset space ~
24807 arg "math-insert \\space"
24811 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24812 For example, the sequence
24817 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24820 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24822 \begin_inset Graphics
24823 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24828 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24829 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24830 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24831 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24832 , because they are negative
24834 Here are two examples:
24837 \begin_layout Standard
24847 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24853 \begin_layout Standard
24863 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24869 \begin_layout Subsection
24871 \begin_inset Index idx
24874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24883 name "subsec:Functions"
24890 \begin_layout Standard
24894 \begin_inset space ~
24899 contains under the button
24902 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24905 a number of function macros, such as
24906 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24910 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24918 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24925 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24926 avoid confusions, because
24927 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24931 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24937 \begin_layout Standard
24938 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24940 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24944 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24950 \begin_layout Standard
24951 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24952 are placed, as described in section
24953 \begin_inset space ~
24957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24959 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24966 \begin_layout Subsection
24968 \begin_inset Index idx
24971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24981 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24983 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24984 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24985 commands, for example, to enter
24986 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24989 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24990 Our example is entered by typing
24995 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25002 \begin_inset space ~
25006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25008 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25012 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25015 \begin_layout Standard
25016 \begin_inset Float table
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25022 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25027 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25031 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25041 \begin_inset Tabular
25042 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25043 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25044 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25045 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25046 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25130 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25400 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25508 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25562 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25607 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25628 \begin_layout Standard
25629 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25632 \begin_inset space ~
25640 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25643 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25647 \begin_layout Section
25648 Brackets and Delimiters
25649 \begin_inset Index idx
25652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25659 \begin_inset Index idx
25662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25671 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25678 \begin_layout Standard
25679 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25681 For some purposes, using just the keys
25686 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25687 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25688 toolbar delimiter icon
25691 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25695 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25696 \begin_inset Formula
25698 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25706 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25707 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25711 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25714 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25720 \begin_inset Formula
25722 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25730 \begin_layout Standard
25731 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25732 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25736 \begin_layout Standard
25737 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25738 left side and right side.
25739 If you use the option
25742 \begin_inset space ~
25747 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25748 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25750 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25755 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25756 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25759 \begin_layout Standard
25760 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25761 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25762 is to go inside the brackets.
25763 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25768 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25769 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25770 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25774 arg "math-delim ( )"
25780 \begin_layout Section
25781 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25782 \begin_inset Index idx
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25792 \begin_inset Index idx
25795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25802 \begin_inset Index idx
25805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25806 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25814 \begin_layout Standard
25815 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25819 \begin_inset space ~
25827 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25831 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25832 Here is an example:
25833 \begin_inset Formula
25835 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25844 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25845 \begin_inset space ~
25849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25851 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25856 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25857 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25858 This alignment is set in the box
25863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25912 for every column as default.
25913 For example, the sequence
25914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25925 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25926 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25927 corresponds to the relevant column.
25928 The result will look like this:
25929 \begin_inset Formula
25932 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25933 column & has & has\,right\\
25934 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25943 \begin_layout Standard
25944 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25947 arg "newline-insert newline"
25950 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25951 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25953 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25956 or the math toolbar.
25959 \begin_layout Standard
25960 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25961 It can be created with the menu
25963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25964 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25966 \begin_inset space ~
25978 Here is an example:
25979 \begin_inset Formula
25993 \begin_layout Standard
25994 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25997 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26000 arg "newline-insert newline"
26004 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26009 arg "newline-insert newline"
26012 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26020 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26021 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26022 A new row is created by every further entry of
26025 arg "newline-insert newline"
26029 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26030 Here is an example:
26031 \begin_inset Formula
26033 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26034 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26039 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26040 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26041 \begin_inset Formula
26043 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26051 \begin_layout Standard
26052 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26059 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26060 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26063 reference "eq:asquared"
26068 The other types are described in section
26069 \begin_inset space ~
26073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26075 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26082 \begin_layout Section
26083 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26084 \begin_inset Index idx
26087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26088 Math ! Formula numbering
26094 \begin_inset Index idx
26097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26098 Math ! Referencing formulas
26104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26106 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26113 \begin_layout Standard
26114 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26116 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26117 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26119 \begin_inset space ~
26123 \begin_inset space ~
26131 arg "math-number-toggle"
26135 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26136 within parentheses.
26137 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26138 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26139 the document class.
26140 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26141 separated by a dot:
26142 \begin_inset Formula
26152 arg "math-number-toggle"
26155 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26156 You can only number displayed formulas.
26159 \begin_layout Standard
26160 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26162 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26163 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26165 \begin_inset space ~
26169 \begin_inset space ~
26177 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26180 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26181 \begin_inset Formula
26184 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26190 To number all lines use the shortcut
26193 arg "math-number-toggle"
26199 \begin_layout Standard
26200 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26203 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26204 A label is inserted with the menu
26206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26215 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26216 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26217 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26229 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26230 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26231 We inserted in the following example the label
26232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26239 in the second line:
26240 \begin_inset Formula
26242 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26243 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26248 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26249 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26250 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26254 \begin_inset space ~
26262 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26266 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26267 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26268 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26269 as the formula number:
26272 \begin_layout Standard
26273 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26276 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26283 \begin_layout Standard
26284 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26285 's cross-reference box are described in section
26286 \begin_inset space ~
26290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26292 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26297 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26305 \begin_layout Section
26306 User defined math macros
26307 \begin_inset Index idx
26310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26319 \begin_layout Standard
26321 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26322 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26323 Math macros are explained in section
26326 \begin_inset space ~
26338 \begin_layout Section
26342 \begin_layout Subsection
26344 \begin_inset Index idx
26347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26356 \begin_layout Standard
26357 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26358 To set a font in a formula, use the
26361 \begin_inset space ~
26369 arg "math-insert \\font"
26372 , or enter its command, listed in table
26373 \begin_inset space ~
26377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26379 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26386 \begin_layout Standard
26387 \begin_inset Float table
26392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26398 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26402 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26412 \begin_inset Tabular
26413 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26414 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26415 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26448 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26475 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26502 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26535 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26562 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26589 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26709 \begin_layout Standard
26710 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26711 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26716 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26717 space when you need a space in the box.
26718 Here is an example where
26719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26730 denotes the set of numbers:
26731 \begin_inset Formula
26733 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26741 \begin_layout Standard
26742 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26743 You can, for example, put a character in
26752 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26756 \begin_inset Newline newline
26759 So it is better not to use this feature.
26762 \begin_layout Standard
26763 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26764 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26768 \begin_inset Newline newline
26771 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26777 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26778 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26784 \begin_layout Standard
26791 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26794 \begin_layout Standard
26795 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26798 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26800 \begin_inset space ~
26808 \begin_layout Subsection
26810 \begin_inset Index idx
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26822 \begin_layout Standard
26823 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26825 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26829 \begin_inset space ~
26833 \begin_inset space ~
26841 \begin_inset space ~
26849 arg "math-insert \\font"
26853 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26854 in black instead of blue.
26855 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26856 Here is an example:
26857 \begin_inset Formula
26860 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26861 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26870 \begin_layout Subsection
26872 \begin_inset Index idx
26875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26884 \begin_layout Standard
26885 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26886 automatically chosen in most situations.
26904 For most characters,
26912 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26913 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26918 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26919 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26920 thinks are appropriate.
26921 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26924 arg "math-insert \\style"
26928 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26929 For example, you can set
26930 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26933 , which is normally in
26942 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26946 The four styles are used in the following example:
26949 \begin_layout Standard
26950 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26954 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26958 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26962 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26968 \begin_layout Standard
26969 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26970 is set in a particular size with the menu
26972 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26974 \begin_inset space ~
26979 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26980 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26981 will be adjusted to correspond.
26982 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26993 \begin_layout Standard
26997 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27003 \begin_layout Section
27004 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27006 \begin_inset Index idx
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27016 \begin_inset Index idx
27019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27028 \begin_layout Standard
27030 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27031 that are in common use.
27034 \begin_layout Subsection
27035 Enabling AMS-Support
27038 \begin_layout Standard
27039 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27040 the document by selecting the checkbox
27043 \begin_inset space ~
27047 \begin_inset space ~
27051 \begin_inset space ~
27058 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27062 \begin_inset Index idx
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27066 Document ! Settings
27074 \begin_inset space ~
27080 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27081 -errors in formulas,
27082 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27085 \begin_layout Subsection
27087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27089 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27094 \begin_inset Index idx
27097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27098 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27106 \begin_layout Standard
27107 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27108 provides a selection of different formula types.
27110 allows you to choose between
27131 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27132 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27139 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27142 \begin_layout Chapter
27146 \begin_layout Section
27148 \begin_inset Index idx
27151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27160 name "sec:Cross-References"
27167 \begin_layout Standard
27168 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27169 's strengths is cross-references.
27170 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27172 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27173 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27174 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27177 \begin_layout Enumerate
27181 \begin_layout Enumerate
27182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27184 name "enu:Second-item"
27191 \begin_layout Enumerate
27195 \begin_layout Standard
27196 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27198 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27201 or by pressing the toolbar button
27208 A gray label box like this:
27209 \begin_inset Graphics
27210 filename clipart/label.png
27214 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27216 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27251 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27252 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27268 \begin_layout Standard
27269 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27274 or the toolbar button
27277 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27281 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27282 \begin_inset Graphics
27283 filename clipart/reference.png
27287 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27289 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27302 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27306 \begin_layout Standard
27307 As an alternative to
27309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27312 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27317 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27318 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27320 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27332 \begin_layout Standard
27333 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27334 \begin_inset space ~
27338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27340 reference "enu:Second-item"
27347 \begin_layout Standard
27348 It is recommended to use a protected space
27352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27353 described in section
27354 \begin_inset space ~
27358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27360 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27369 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27370 line breaks between them.
27373 \begin_layout Standard
27374 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27377 \begin_layout Description
27378 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27381 reference "fig:Two-images"
27388 \begin_layout Description
27389 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27390 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27402 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27409 \begin_layout Description
27410 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27411 \begin_inset space ~
27415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27416 LatexCommand pageref
27417 reference "fig:Two-images"
27424 \begin_layout Description
27426 \begin_inset space ~
27430 \begin_inset space ~
27433 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27435 LatexCommand vpageref
27436 reference "fig:Two-images"
27441 \begin_inset Newline newline
27444 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27445 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27446 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27447 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27448 it prints “on the next page”.
27449 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27452 \begin_layout Description
27454 \begin_inset space ~
27458 \begin_inset space ~
27462 \begin_inset space ~
27465 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27468 reference "fig:Two-images"
27473 \begin_inset Newline newline
27476 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27482 ; otherwise it behaves like
27486 \begin_inset space ~
27490 \begin_inset space ~
27499 \begin_layout Description
27501 \begin_inset space ~
27504 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27505 \begin_inset Newline newline
27509 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27517 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27527 \begin_inset Index idx
27530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27532 packages ! prettyref
27538 \begin_inset Index idx
27541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27543 packages ! refstyle
27554 \begin_inset Newline newline
27557 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27558 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27561 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27574 is the default and preferred because
27578 supports only English documents.
27579 The format is specified by using the command
27591 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27592 preamble of the document.
27593 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27611 \begin_inset Newline newline
27618 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27623 \begin_inset Newline newline
27634 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27635 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27637 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27638 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27643 , you might do so as follows:
27644 \begin_inset Newline newline
27651 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27656 \begin_inset Newline newline
27659 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27660 the package documentation
27661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27663 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27669 \begin_inset Newline newline
27680 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27687 \begin_layout Description
27689 \begin_inset space ~
27692 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27694 LatexCommand nameref
27695 reference "fig:Two-images"
27702 \begin_layout Description
27704 \begin_inset space ~
27707 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27708 label for the reference:
27709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27710 LatexCommand labelonly
27711 reference "fig:Two-images"
27716 \begin_inset Newline newline
27719 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27720 Code, if you want to issue a command
27721 that \SpecialChar LyX
27727 , then you may want to use the
27730 \begin_inset space ~
27735 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27745 This is the form needed for e.
27746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27750 \begin_inset space \space{}
27757 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27758 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27760 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27764 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27768 \begin_layout Standard
27769 You can only use the style
27773 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27777 is always possible.
27780 \begin_layout Standard
27781 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27782 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27784 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27785 \begin_inset space ~
27789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27791 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27798 \begin_layout Standard
27799 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27803 \begin_inset space ~
27807 \begin_inset space ~
27812 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27813 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27816 \begin_inset space ~
27821 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27822 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27825 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27831 \begin_layout Standard
27832 You can change labels at any time.
27833 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27834 do not need to think about this.
27837 \begin_layout Standard
27838 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27840 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27844 \begin_layout Standard
27845 References are described in detail in the section
27846 \begin_inset space ~
27856 \begin_inset space ~
27864 \begin_layout Section
27865 Table of Contents and other Listings
27866 \begin_inset Index idx
27869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27876 \begin_inset Index idx
27879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27880 Navigating ! Outline
27886 \begin_inset Index idx
27889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27905 \begin_layout Subsection
27907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27909 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27916 \begin_layout Standard
27917 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27920 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27922 \begin_inset space ~
27926 \begin_inset space ~
27932 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27934 If you click on it, the
27938 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27939 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27940 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27942 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27944 \begin_inset space ~
27949 that is described in section
27950 \begin_inset space ~
27954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27956 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27963 \begin_layout Standard
27964 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27965 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27967 \begin_inset space ~
27971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27973 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27977 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27979 \begin_inset space ~
27983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27985 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27989 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27991 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27994 \begin_layout Subsection
27995 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27998 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28005 \begin_layout Standard
28006 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28008 You can insert them via the
28010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28014 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28017 \begin_layout Section
28018 URLs and Hyperlinks
28019 \begin_inset Index idx
28022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28029 \begin_inset Index idx
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28041 \begin_layout Subsection
28043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28052 \begin_layout Standard
28053 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28061 \begin_layout Standard
28062 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28064 \begin_inset Flex URL
28067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28069 https://www.lyx.org
28077 \begin_layout Standard
28078 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28084 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28088 \begin_layout Standard
28089 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28097 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28106 \begin_layout Subsection
28108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28110 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28118 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28123 or with the toolbar button
28130 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28139 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28140 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28141 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28143 name "LyX's homepage"
28144 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28149 , an Email address like this:
28150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28152 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28153 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28159 , or a link to a file.
28164 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28172 \begin_layout Standard
28173 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28186 to the link target.
28189 \begin_layout Standard
28190 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28191 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28192 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28193 the text style dialog.
28194 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28198 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28200 name "LyX's homepage"
28201 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28209 \begin_layout Standard
28210 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28214 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28217 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28221 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28223 \begin_inset Newline newline
28231 \begin_inset Newline newline
28238 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28241 \begin_layout Section
28243 \begin_inset Index idx
28246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28255 name "sec:Appendices"
28262 \begin_layout Standard
28263 Appendices are created with the menu
28265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28267 \begin_inset space ~
28271 \begin_inset space ~
28277 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28278 as the appendix part of the book.
28279 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28282 \begin_layout Standard
28283 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28284 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28285 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28286 and the subsection number.
28287 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28291 \begin_layout Standard
28293 \begin_inset space ~
28297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28299 reference "chap:Credits"
28304 \begin_inset space ~
28308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28310 reference "subsec:Export"
28317 \begin_layout Section
28319 \begin_inset Index idx
28322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28331 name "sec:Bibliography"
28338 \begin_layout Standard
28339 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28341 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28342 \begin_inset space ~
28346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28348 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28355 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28360 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28361 \begin_inset space ~
28365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28367 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28372 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28373 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28374 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28378 using a bibliography database.
28381 \begin_layout Standard
28382 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28383 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28387 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28388 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28389 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28390 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28391 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28394 \begin_layout Subsection
28395 The Bibliography Environment
28396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28398 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28405 \begin_layout Standard
28410 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28412 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28421 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28423 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28424 of ASCII characters only.
28428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28430 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28433 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28439 \begin_inset Newline newline
28443 \begin_inset Flex URL
28446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28448 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28460 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28470 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28471 \begin_inset Newline newline
28478 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28479 the number of the entry.
28484 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28494 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28499 or the toolbar button
28502 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28506 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28507 containing the available citations.
28508 Select one or more keys from the list and
28518 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28519 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28523 \begin_layout Standard
28524 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28525 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28526 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28538 \begin_layout Standard
28542 Companion Second Edition
28545 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28547 key "latexcompanion"
28555 \begin_layout Standard
28556 The \SpecialChar LyX
28557 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28558 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28568 \begin_layout Standard
28569 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28576 \begin_inset Index idx
28579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28587 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28599 Author A and Author B(Year)
28600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28607 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28609 Then, if you select
28612 \begin_inset space ~
28617 in the document settings
28618 \begin_inset Index idx
28621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28622 Document ! Settings
28629 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28631 \begin_inset space ~
28637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28639 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28646 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28653 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28655 \begin_inset space ~
28663 arg "layout-paragraph"
28667 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28670 \begin_layout Subsection
28671 Bibliography databases
28672 \begin_inset Index idx
28675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28676 Bibliography ! Databases
28682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28684 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28691 \begin_layout Standard
28692 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28698 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28700 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28701 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28706 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28708 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28709 your working field in a database.
28710 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28711 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28712 list for that document.
28713 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28717 \begin_layout Standard
28718 The database is a text file with the file extension
28719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28730 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28731 The format is explained in
28732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28739 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28741 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28743 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28749 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28750 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28751 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28753 \begin_inset Flex URL
28756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28758 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28766 \begin_layout Standard
28768 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28769 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28770 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28772 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28774 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28775 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28776 Those are addressed by
28781 \begin_inset Index idx
28784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28786 packages ! biblatex
28792 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28793 (although it has been significantly
28794 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28804 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28805 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28806 might conversely fail to correctly
28807 handle databases that use specific
28816 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28820 \begin_layout Standard
28821 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28826 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28828 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28832 \begin_inset Index idx
28835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28836 Document ! Settings
28848 \begin_inset space ~
28853 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28862 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28864 \begin_inset Index idx
28867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28868 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28877 \begin_layout Standard
28878 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28886 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28888 \begin_inset space ~
28894 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28895 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28903 Add bibliography to TOC
28905 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28910 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28911 in the document or just the cited references.
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28915 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28916 style file is a text file with the file extension
28917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28928 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28929 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28930 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28931 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28933 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28939 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28940 \begin_inset Newline newline
28944 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28946 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28956 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28961 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28965 \begin_layout Standard
28966 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28971 \begin_inset Index idx
28974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28975 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28981 \begin_inset Index idx
28984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28986 packages ! biblatex
28994 \begin_layout Standard
28995 Accessing a database via
28999 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29007 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29009 \begin_inset space ~
29015 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29016 you cannot select a
29021 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29025 \begin_layout Standard
29030 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29043 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29044 file (text file with the file extension
29045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29056 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29057 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29059 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29063 \begin_layout Standard
29068 styles are not set in the
29071 \begin_inset space ~
29076 dialog, but in the document settings.
29077 \begin_inset Index idx
29080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29081 Document ! Settings
29086 However, in the dialog in the
29090 field, which is only visible if you use
29094 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29095 example how its heading will appear).
29096 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29101 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29111 \begin_layout Standard
29112 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29113 \begin_inset space ~
29117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29119 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29130 Bibliography Processors
29133 \begin_layout Standard
29134 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29135 uses a bibliography processor,
29136 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29137 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29138 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29140 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29141 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29144 \begin_layout Standard
29145 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29147 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29148 You can do this on a general level in
29150 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29151 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29152 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29155 or for individual documents in
29157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29158 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29162 The following variants are available by default:
29165 \begin_layout Description
29166 biber a specific, modern processor
29167 \begin_inset Index idx
29170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29177 developed exclusively for
29181 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29187 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29192 makes use of; if you use the
29196 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29203 \begin_layout Description
29204 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29205 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29206 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29210 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29213 \begin_layout Description
29214 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29215 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29219 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29223 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29227 features are supported.
29230 \begin_layout Standard
29231 By default (with the
29237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29238 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29251 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29252 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29253 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29256 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29257 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29270 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29271 -based bibliography styles).
29272 This should suit most needs.
29275 \begin_layout Standard
29276 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29277 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29278 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29283 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29284 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29285 You can adjust it in
29287 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29288 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29289 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29295 \begin_layout Standard
29296 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29297 can add below the selection.
29298 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29299 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29305 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29321 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29323 These are explained in detail in section
29325 Customizing Bibliographies
29329 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29334 Additional Features
29339 \begin_layout Subsection
29341 \begin_inset Index idx
29344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29345 Bibliography ! Citation format
29351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29353 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29360 \begin_layout Standard
29361 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29366 \begin_inset space \space{}
29369 numerical citation (as
29370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29377 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29385 ) or author-year citations (as
29386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29395 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29399 \begin_layout Standard
29400 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29404 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29408 \begin_inset Index idx
29411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29412 Document ! Settings
29417 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29423 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29424 labels, is there to use
29427 \begin_inset space ~
29438 \begin_inset space ~
29443 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29446 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29453 \begin_layout Standard
29454 With a bibliography database (see
29455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29457 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29464 ) one has in contrary to the
29468 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29469 These style formats are available:
29472 \begin_layout Description
29474 \begin_inset space ~
29477 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29478 -based approached without any additional packages
29479 (simple numeric citations).
29482 \begin_layout Description
29483 Biblatex loads the package
29488 \begin_inset Index idx
29491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29493 packages ! biblatex
29498 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29500 Biblatex citation style
29504 Biblatex bibliography style
29507 Options to the package
29511 can be entered in the
29518 \begin_layout Description
29520 \begin_inset space ~
29524 \begin_inset space ~
29527 mode) loads the package
29531 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29532 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29544 behavior very closely.
29549 this option has some additional styles.
29554 styles are also supported by this variant.
29557 \begin_layout Description
29559 \begin_inset space ~
29562 (BibTeX) loads the package
29567 \begin_inset Index idx
29570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29577 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29580 \begin_layout Description
29582 \begin_inset space ~
29585 (BibTeX) loads the package
29590 \begin_inset Index idx
29593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29600 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29603 \begin_layout Standard
29612 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29614 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29623 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29625 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29626 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29628 Biblatex citation style
29631 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29637 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29641 \begin_layout Standard
29642 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29643 are available in the
29648 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29649 a name prefix such as
29650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29665 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29670 \begin_inset space \space{}
29674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29686 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29692 \begin_inset space \space{}
29695 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29701 \begin_inset space \space{}
29705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29717 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29721 \begin_inset space ~
29729 \begin_inset space ~
29735 Here is a simple example where the text
29736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29740 \begin_inset space ~
29744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29747 appears after the reference:
29750 \begin_layout Quote
29752 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29755 key "latexcompanion"
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29764 All styles except for
29768 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29778 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29782 \begin_layout Standard
29783 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29784 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29785 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29790 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29791 multi-citation (so-called
29792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29795 qualified citation lists
29796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29802 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29807 dialog will display three columns in the field
29814 \begin_inset space ~
29822 \begin_inset space ~
29830 \begin_inset space ~
29836 If you double-click on an item's
29839 \begin_inset space ~
29847 \begin_inset space ~
29852 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29855 General text before
29861 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29864 \begin_layout Section
29866 \begin_inset Index idx
29869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29885 \begin_layout Standard
29886 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29890 \begin_inset space ~
29895 or the toolbar button
29902 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29903 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29904 by \SpecialChar LyX
29905 as the index entry.
29908 \begin_layout Standard
29909 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29912 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29914 \begin_inset space ~
29920 A light blue box labeled
29921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29932 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29933 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29939 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29940 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29941 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29943 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29945 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29953 \begin_layout Subsection
29954 Grouping Index Entries
29955 \begin_inset Index idx
29958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29967 \begin_layout Standard
29968 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29970 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29971 lists under the entry
29972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29980 First we create the entry
29981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29989 \begin_inset space ~
29993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29995 reference "subsec:Lists"
30000 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30001 \begin_inset space ~
30005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30007 reference "sec:Itemize"
30011 , we insert the command
30014 \begin_layout Standard
30020 \begin_layout Standard
30024 \begin_layout Standard
30030 \begin_layout Standard
30031 for the enumerated list in section
30032 \begin_inset space ~
30036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30038 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30045 \begin_layout Standard
30046 The exclamation mark
30047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30054 marks the grouping levels.
30055 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30056 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30057 If we don't have an index entry for
30058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30065 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30068 \begin_layout Subsection
30070 \begin_inset Index idx
30073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30074 Index ! Page ranges
30082 \begin_layout Standard
30083 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30085 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30086 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30087 an index entry in section
30088 \begin_inset space ~
30092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30094 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30101 \begin_layout Standard
30104 Paragraph environments|(
30107 \begin_layout Standard
30108 and another entry at the end of section
30109 \begin_inset space ~
30113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30115 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30122 \begin_layout Standard
30125 Paragraph environments|)
30128 \begin_layout Standard
30130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30153 respectively start and end the index range.
30154 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30155 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30156 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30157 An example is the index entry
30158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30161 Document ! Settings
30162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30168 \begin_layout Subsection
30170 \begin_inset Index idx
30173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30174 Index ! Cross referencing
30182 \begin_layout Standard
30183 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30184 We referred for example in the index entry
30185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30193 \begin_inset space ~
30197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30199 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30203 ) to the index entry
30204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30211 in the same section using the entry
30214 \begin_layout Standard
30217 GIF|see{Image formats}
30220 \begin_layout Standard
30221 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30223 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30224 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30227 \begin_layout Subsection
30229 \begin_inset Index idx
30232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30233 Index ! Entry order
30241 \begin_layout Standard
30242 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30243 follow the rules for the index order.
30244 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30250 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30252 \begin_inset space ~
30256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30258 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30267 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30268 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30293 \begin_inset Index idx
30296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30297 Dummy entries ! maïs
30303 \begin_inset Index idx
30306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30307 Dummy entries ! maître
30313 \begin_inset Index idx
30316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30322 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30323 maïs, maison, maître.
30324 To achieve this, we use the command
30327 \begin_layout Standard
30330 previous entry@current entry
30333 \begin_layout Standard
30334 In our case we want to have
30335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30350 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30353 \begin_layout Standard
30359 \begin_layout Standard
30360 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30361 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30363 See the next subsection for an example.
30366 \begin_layout Subsection
30368 \begin_inset Index idx
30371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30372 Index ! Entry layout
30380 \begin_layout Standard
30381 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30382 \begin_inset Index idx
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30388 This is an italic dummy entry
30393 You can also format the page number using the character
30394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30401 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30402 -command without a backslash.
30403 We can write for example
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30409 italic page number:|textit
30412 \begin_layout Standard
30413 to get the page number in italic.
30414 \begin_inset Index idx
30417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30418 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30423 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30424 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30442 \begin_inset space ~
30448 Have a look at section
30449 \begin_inset space ~
30453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30455 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30459 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30463 \begin_layout Standard
30464 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30472 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30476 to generate the index, see section
30477 \begin_inset space ~
30481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30483 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30492 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30497 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30498 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30501 key "latexcompanion"
30514 \begin_layout Standard
30515 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30517 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30518 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30519 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30520 If so, put the following in the preamble
30523 \begin_layout Standard
30535 \begin_layout Standard
30539 \begin_layout Standard
30545 \begin_layout Standard
30546 in the index entry.
30547 \begin_inset Index idx
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30551 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30556 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30557 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30558 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30562 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30563 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30564 a bold font for all index entries.
30565 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30577 documentation for details,
30578 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30580 key "makeindex,xindy"
30588 \begin_layout Subsection
30590 \begin_inset Index idx
30593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30602 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30610 If the index generation program
30614 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30615 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30619 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30620 distribution, is used.
30624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30629 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30630 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30631 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30632 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30633 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30643 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30645 dialog, see section
30646 \begin_inset space ~
30650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30652 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30657 The available options are listed and explained in
30658 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30660 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30666 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30670 \begin_layout Standard
30671 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30672 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30675 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30676 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30680 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30681 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30684 \begin_layout Subsection
30688 \begin_layout Standard
30689 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30690 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30698 next to the standard index.
30700 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30701 that add this feature.
30708 \begin_inset Index idx
30711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30713 packages ! splitidx
30718 package to generate multiple indexes.
30719 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30725 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30727 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30735 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30736 style, but it also includes
30737 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30738 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30746 \begin_layout Standard
30747 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30748 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30750 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30751 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30754 and select the option
30756 Use multiple Indexes
30763 already contains the standard index
30764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30772 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30773 also appear as a heading) to the
30777 input field and press the
30782 The new index now also appears in the list.
30783 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30784 label color to the new index.
30787 \begin_layout Standard
30788 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30798 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30799 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30800 are additional features:
30803 \begin_layout Itemize
30804 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30805 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30808 \begin_layout Itemize
30809 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30810 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30815 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30816 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30817 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30818 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30821 \begin_layout Itemize
30826 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30827 code in the name of the index.
30830 \begin_layout Section
30831 Nomenclature/Glossary
30832 \begin_inset Index idx
30835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30842 \begin_inset Index idx
30845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30876 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30883 \begin_layout Standard
30884 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30885 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30886 called nomenclature or glossary.
30889 \begin_layout Standard
30890 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30897 \begin_inset Index idx
30900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30908 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30910 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30917 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30921 \begin_layout Standard
30922 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30923 and then use the menu
30925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30931 \begin_inset space ~
30936 or the toolbar button
30939 arg "nomencl-insert"
30944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30955 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30958 \begin_layout Standard
30959 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30960 The first is the term or
30964 that you wish to define.
30969 of the term or symbol.
30972 \begin_layout Standard
30973 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30981 To use \SpecialChar TeX
30982 code for nomenclature entries the option
30986 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
30994 \begin_layout Subsection
30995 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30996 \begin_inset Index idx
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31000 Nomenclature ! Layout
31008 \begin_layout Standard
31009 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31013 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31020 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31028 \begin_inset Newline newline
31036 \begin_inset Newline newline
31042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31049 character starts/ends the formula.
31050 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31051 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31063 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31073 \begin_layout Standard
31074 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31075 syntax is given in section
31076 \begin_inset space ~
31080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31082 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31089 \begin_layout Standard
31093 \begin_inset space ~
31098 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31100 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31105 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31112 in this document is:
31113 \begin_inset Newline newline
31118 dummy entry for the character
31123 \begin_inset Newline newline
31135 \begin_inset space ~
31145 font use the command
31174 \begin_layout Standard
31175 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31180 \begin_inset space \space{}
31184 \begin_inset Newline newline
31200 \begin_inset Newline newline
31203 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31204 This command will make the font of all symbols
31211 \begin_inset space ~
31219 \begin_layout Standard
31220 If the characters |
31221 \begin_inset space \space{}
31225 \begin_inset space \space{}
31229 \begin_inset space \space{}
31233 \begin_inset space \space{}
31237 \begin_inset space \space{}
31240 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31241 code they need to be escaped
31242 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31243 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31244 LatexCommand nomenclature
31245 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31246 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31254 \begin_layout Subsection
31255 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31256 \begin_inset Index idx
31259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31260 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31268 \begin_layout Standard
31269 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31270 -code of the symbol
31272 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31274 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31277 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31278 LatexCommand nomenclature
31280 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31288 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31292 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31293 LatexCommand nomenclature
31296 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31302 They will be sorted by
31303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31329 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31332 will be sorted before the
31336 since the character
31337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31344 is considered in sorting.
31347 \begin_layout Standard
31348 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31351 \begin_inset space ~
31356 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31357 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31359 For the example given, you can insert
31363 in this field for the
31364 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31371 will be located before
31372 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31379 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31384 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31394 \begin_layout Subsection
31395 Nomenclature Options
31396 \begin_inset Index idx
31399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31400 Nomenclature ! Options
31406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31408 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31415 \begin_layout Standard
31420 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31421 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31424 \begin_layout Description
31425 refeq Appends the phrase
31426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31441 to every nomenclature entry, where
31447 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31450 \begin_layout Description
31451 refpage Appends the phrase
31452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31467 to every nomenclature entry, where
31473 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31476 \begin_layout Description
31477 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31480 \begin_layout Standard
31481 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31482 class options list in the
31484 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31488 In this document the options
31495 \begin_layout Standard
31496 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31502 \begin_layout Standard
31503 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31504 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31509 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31512 \begin_layout Description
31522 \begin_layout Description
31525 nomrefpage Like the
31532 \begin_layout Description
31535 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31544 \begin_layout Description
31548 \begin_inset space ~
31554 \begin_inset space ~
31559 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31562 \begin_layout Standard
31564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31571 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31572 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31576 \begin_layout Standard
31585 \begin_inset Newline newline
31591 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31595 \begin_inset space ~
31607 unskip, see equation
31610 \begin_inset Newline newline
31617 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31618 \begin_inset Newline newline
31624 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31628 \begin_inset space ~
31645 \begin_layout Standard
31646 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31649 \begin_inset space ~
31654 in the document settings under
31657 \begin_inset space ~
31665 \begin_layout Standard
31673 \begin_inset Newline newline
31677 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31681 \begin_inset space ~
31693 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31695 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
31696 \begin_inset Newline newline
31703 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31704 \begin_inset Newline newline
31708 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31712 \begin_inset space ~
31724 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
31729 \begin_layout Subsection
31730 Printing the Nomenclature
31731 \begin_inset Index idx
31734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31735 Nomenclature ! Printing
31743 \begin_layout Standard
31744 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31747 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31763 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31764 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31765 You can choose between these settings:
31768 \begin_layout Description
31769 Default a space of 1
31770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31776 \begin_layout Description
31778 \begin_inset space ~
31782 \begin_inset space ~
31785 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31788 \begin_layout Description
31789 Custom custom space
31792 \begin_layout Standard
31793 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31802 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31810 For example, in order to change the name to
31814 , add the following line to the preamble:
31817 \begin_layout Standard
31825 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31828 \begin_layout Subsection
31829 Nomenclature Program
31830 \begin_inset Index idx
31833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31834 Nomenclature ! Program
31840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31842 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31849 \begin_layout Standard
31855 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31856 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31858 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31863 by adding options, see section
31864 \begin_inset space ~
31868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31870 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31875 The available options are listed and explained in
31876 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31878 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31886 \begin_layout Section
31888 \begin_inset Index idx
31891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31898 \begin_inset Index idx
31901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31902 Document ! Branches
31908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31910 name "sec:Branches"
31917 \begin_layout Standard
31918 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31919 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31920 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31921 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31924 \begin_layout Standard
31925 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31926 allows you to put text into branches.
31927 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31928 To create a branch, either select the menu
31930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31931 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31934 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31943 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31944 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31945 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31946 and whether the name of the branch should
31947 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31948 (see below for an example).
31949 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31950 to the name of the other) and to add
31951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31963 \begin_inset space ~
31966 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31967 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31970 \begin_layout Standard
31971 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31972 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31977 where you can choose a branch.
31978 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31982 \begin_layout Standard
31983 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31984 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31987 \begin_layout Standard
31988 \begin_inset Branch Question
31992 \begin_layout Standard
31997 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32005 \begin_layout Standard
32006 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32010 \begin_layout Standard
32015 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32031 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32034 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32035 Consider for example a file
32036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32043 which has the above branches.
32045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32052 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32076 branch were inactive,
32077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32092 branch was active, likewise
32093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32108 branch was active, and
32109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32112 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32116 if both branches were active.
32117 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32118 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32124 \begin_layout Standard
32125 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32131 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32132 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32136 \begin_inset space ~
32144 \begin_layout Standard
32145 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32149 \begin_layout Standard
32155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32162 branch is deactivated.
32168 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32175 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32176 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32177 definitions for each branch.
32178 For example you can define for the question branch
32182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32183 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32184 -syntax, see section
32185 \begin_inset space ~
32189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32191 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32203 \begin_layout Standard
32213 \begin_layout Standard
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32224 and for the answer branch
32227 \begin_layout Standard
32237 \begin_layout Standard
32247 \begin_layout Standard
32248 \begin_inset Branch Question
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32284 \begin_layout Standard
32285 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32289 \begin_layout Standard
32293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32321 \begin_layout Standard
32322 Now it is possible to use the
32326 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32333 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32336 commands to obtain conditional output.
32337 Here is an example formula where only the
32344 \begin_inset Formula
32346 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32354 \begin_layout Standard
32355 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32364 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32370 \begin_inset space \space{}
32373 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32375 For this advanced usage, see the
32381 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32386 \begin_layout Section
32388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32390 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32395 \begin_inset Index idx
32398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32407 \begin_layout Standard
32410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32411 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32414 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32416 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32422 \begin_inset Index idx
32425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32427 packages ! hyperref
32432 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32433 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32434 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32435 part of the document.
32439 \begin_layout Standard
32440 The header information in the dialog tab
32444 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32445 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32446 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32447 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32451 \begin_inset space ~
32455 \begin_inset space ~
32460 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32461 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32462 and author entries.
32466 \begin_inset space ~
32470 \begin_inset space ~
32474 \begin_inset space ~
32479 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32482 \begin_layout Standard
32483 You can specify in the dialog tab
32487 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32492 \begin_inset space ~
32496 \begin_inset space ~
32500 \begin_inset space ~
32505 option allows long links to be split;
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32512 \begin_inset space ~
32516 \begin_inset space ~
32524 \begin_inset space ~
32529 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32532 \begin_inset space ~
32537 colors the different links.
32538 The default colors are:
32541 \begin_layout Labeling
32542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32547 for hyperlinks and URLs
32550 \begin_layout Labeling
32551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32559 \begin_layout Labeling
32560 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32568 \begin_layout Standard
32569 but you can change these in the field
32574 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32577 \begin_layout Standard
32580 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32588 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32589 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32590 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32593 \begin_layout Standard
32598 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32599 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32600 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32610 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32611 when opening the PDF.
32613 \begin_inset space ~
32616 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32617 \begin_inset space ~
32620 1 will only display the sections.
32623 \begin_layout Standard
32624 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32625 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32631 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32632 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32642 \begin_layout Section
32644 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32648 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32655 \begin_layout Subsection
32658 \begin_inset Index idx
32661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32671 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32678 \begin_layout Standard
32679 As \SpecialChar LyX
32680 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32681 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32682 commands and constructs,
32685 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32686 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32687 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32688 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32689 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32690 cannot support all packages and
32694 \begin_layout Standard
32695 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32696 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32697 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32701 Code box is created by the menu
32703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32705 \begin_inset space ~
32710 or by the toolbar button
32723 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32731 \begin_layout Standard
32732 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32734 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32736 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32741 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32746 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32753 , you can write the command part
32759 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32760 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32764 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32765 Code box behind the word.
32766 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32767 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32771 \begin_layout Standard
32772 \begin_inset Graphics
32773 filename clipart/ERT.png
32781 \begin_layout Standard
32785 \begin_layout Standard
32786 This is a line with a
32790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32813 \begin_layout Standard
32814 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32822 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32823 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32824 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32825 know that the command is finished.
32833 \begin_layout Subsection
32834 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32836 \begin_inset Argument 1
32839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32840 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32847 \begin_inset Index idx
32850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32860 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32867 \begin_layout Standard
32868 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32869 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32870 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32871 uses in the background.
32872 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32873 is based on commands, you can
32874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32882 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32883 any time if you know the right commands.
32884 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32885 is the end of the day.
32886 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32887 all caption labels bold.
32888 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32890 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32894 \begin_layout Standard
32895 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32897 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32899 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32912 \begin_layout Standard
32913 As result you find that the package
32918 \begin_inset Index idx
32921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32929 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32934 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32938 \begin_inset space ~
32946 \begin_layout Standard
32951 usepackage[options]{package name}
32954 \begin_layout Standard
32955 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32956 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32957 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32958 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32961 \begin_layout Standard
32962 In your case the package name is
32967 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32972 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32973 So you add the command
32976 \begin_layout Standard
32981 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32984 \begin_layout Standard
32985 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32990 For more commands provided by the
32994 package, have a look at its documentation,
32995 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33010 \begin_layout Standard
33011 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33013 For example if you use a
33017 class, you don't need the package
33021 , you can instead write
33024 \begin_layout Standard
33029 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33035 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33036 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33037 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33044 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33049 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33051 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33052 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33053 Code box as described in the previous
33057 \begin_layout Standard
33058 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33059 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33064 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33072 \begin_layout Standard
33073 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33079 \begin_layout Standard
33083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33093 \begin_inset Note Note
33096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33097 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33105 \begin_layout Left Header
33106 \begin_inset Argument 1
33109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33129 \begin_inset Note Note
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 defines the header line as described below
33141 \begin_layout Center Header
33142 \begin_inset Argument 1
33145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33154 \begin_layout Right Header
33155 \begin_inset Argument 1
33158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33179 \begin_layout Left Footer
33180 \begin_inset Argument 1
33183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33204 \begin_layout Center Footer
33205 \begin_inset Argument 1
33208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33220 \begin_inset Newline newline
33224 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33230 \begin_layout Right Footer
33231 \begin_inset Argument 1
33234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33256 \begin_layout Section
33257 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33260 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33265 \begin_inset Index idx
33268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33269 Document ! Header/Footer line
33275 \begin_inset Index idx
33278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33287 \begin_layout Standard
33288 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33292 \begin_inset space ~
33303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33309 \begin_inset space ~
33315 As a second step add in the menu
33317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33318 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33327 Custom Header/Footerlines
33330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33334 This module offers the following 6
33335 \begin_inset space ~
33341 \begin_layout Description
33343 \begin_inset space ~
33347 \begin_inset space ~
33351 \begin_inset space ~
33355 \begin_inset space ~
33359 \begin_inset space ~
33365 \begin_layout Description
33367 \begin_inset space ~
33371 \begin_inset space ~
33375 \begin_inset space ~
33379 \begin_inset space ~
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33389 \begin_layout Standard
33390 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33391 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33394 \begin_layout Standard
33395 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33396 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33398 \begin_inset space ~
33402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33404 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33408 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33411 \begin_layout Standard
33412 \begin_inset Float figure
33418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33421 \begin_inset Tabular
33422 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33423 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33424 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33425 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33426 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33428 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33446 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33457 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33475 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33486 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33490 The normal text on the page goes here.
33491 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33493 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33494 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33499 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33508 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33519 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33537 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33548 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33566 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33584 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33589 name "fig:Page-layout"
33593 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33606 \begin_layout Standard
33607 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33615 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33624 is set to “Default”.
33625 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33634 \begin_layout Subsection
33638 \begin_layout Standard
33639 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33640 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33641 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33642 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33644 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33646 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33649 \begin_layout Standard
33650 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33651 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33657 \begin_inset space ~
33665 \begin_layout Description
33668 thepage prints the current page number
33671 \begin_layout Description
33674 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33677 \begin_layout Description
33680 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33683 \begin_layout Description
33686 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33687 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33694 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33697 because it usually goes in a left header.
33700 \begin_layout Description
33703 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33704 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33706 It is normally used in the right header.
33709 \begin_layout Subsection
33710 Default header/footer
33713 \begin_layout Standard
33714 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33715 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33716 footer has the page number.
33717 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33718 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33719 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33722 \begin_inset space ~
33730 \begin_layout Subsection
33734 \begin_layout Standard
33735 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33736 Some pages are different.
33737 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33738 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33739 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33740 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33741 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33745 Header and footer decoration line
33748 \begin_layout Standard
33749 By default, you get a 0.4
33750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33753 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33754 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33766 in the following way:
33769 \begin_layout Standard
33776 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33779 \begin_layout Standard
33780 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33793 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33800 \begin_layout Standard
33801 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33803 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33804 \begin_inset space ~
33808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33818 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33819 Several header/footer lines
33822 \begin_layout Standard
33823 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33824 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33825 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33827 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33843 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33845 \begin_inset space ~
33853 \begin_layout Standard
33860 headheight}{height}
33863 \begin_layout Standard
33868 is a size in standard units (e.
33869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33873 \begin_inset space \space{}
33881 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33882 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33883 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33884 logfile with the menu
33886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33888 \begin_inset space ~
33896 \begin_inset space ~
33901 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33906 \begin_inset Index idx
33909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33911 packages ! fancyhdr
33917 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33918 for your header/footer.
33921 \begin_layout Subsection
33925 \begin_layout Standard
33926 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33927 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33928 This example consists of the following definition:
33931 \begin_layout Description
33933 \begin_inset space ~
33942 , empty optional argument
33945 \begin_layout Description
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33950 Header empty, empty optional argument
33953 \begin_layout Description
33955 \begin_inset space ~
33964 in the optional argument
33967 \begin_layout Description
33969 \begin_inset space ~
33978 in the optional argument
33981 \begin_layout Description
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34000 \begin_inset Newline newline
34004 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34011 in the optional argument
34014 \begin_layout Description
34016 \begin_inset space ~
34025 , empty optional argument
34028 \begin_layout Description
34031 headrulewidth set to 2
34032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34039 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34040 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34046 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34056 \begin_layout Standard
34057 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34063 \begin_layout Standard
34067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34071 pagestyle{headings}
34077 \begin_inset Note Note
34080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34081 switches back to page style with the default headings
34089 \begin_layout Section
34090 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34093 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34098 \begin_inset Index idx
34101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34108 \begin_inset Index idx
34111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34120 \begin_layout Standard
34122 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34123 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34124 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34127 \begin_layout Subsection
34131 \begin_layout Standard
34132 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34138 \begin_inset Index idx
34141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34143 packages ! preview-latex
34148 (on some systems named simply
34153 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34155 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34162 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34164 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34172 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34173 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34174 -package are automatically
34175 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34179 \begin_layout Subsection
34183 \begin_layout Standard
34184 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34185 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34187 activate the option
34190 \begin_inset space ~
34197 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34203 \begin_inset space ~
34207 \begin_inset space ~
34210 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34217 \begin_inset space ~
34230 \begin_inset space ~
34235 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34238 \begin_layout Standard
34239 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34252 \begin_inset space ~
34260 \begin_layout Standard
34261 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34262 and when you finish
34266 \begin_layout Standard
34267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34275 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34276 generated by activating the option
34279 \begin_inset space ~
34285 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34293 \begin_layout Subsection
34294 Selected document parts
34297 \begin_layout Standard
34298 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34299 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34300 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34301 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34303 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34309 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34310 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34311 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34314 \begin_layout Standard
34315 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34322 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34334 is explained in section
34336 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34341 \begin_inset space ~
34351 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34352 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34353 the final rotated boxes,
34354 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34355 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34357 Here is the result:
34360 \begin_layout Standard
34361 \begin_inset Preview
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34372 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34378 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34388 height_special "totalheight"
34393 backgroundcolor "none"
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34421 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34427 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34450 Previewing works also for colors.
34451 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34470 is explained in section
34477 \begin_inset space ~
34490 \begin_layout Standard
34491 \begin_inset Preview
34493 \begin_layout Standard
34497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34516 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34521 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34540 \begin_layout Standard
34541 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34547 \begin_layout Standard
34548 If \SpecialChar LyX
34549 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34550 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34551 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34552 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34553 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34554 the \SpecialChar TeX
34556 If \SpecialChar LyX
34557 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34558 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34560 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34561 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34562 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34565 \begin_layout Subsection
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34571 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34572 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34575 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34577 \begin_inset space ~
34582 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34584 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34586 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34587 's main window, then only this selection
34588 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34589 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34590 the source view window.
34595 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34596 ; but note that if you have
34597 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34599 not just the one which is open at the time.
34602 \begin_layout Section
34603 Advanced Find and Replace
34604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34606 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34611 \begin_inset Index idx
34614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34621 \begin_inset Index idx
34624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 \begin_layout Subsection
34637 \begin_layout Standard
34638 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34639 allows for searching of complex,
34640 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34642 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34643 The key-features are:
34646 \begin_layout Itemize
34647 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34648 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34649 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34653 \begin_layout Itemize
34654 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34655 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34656 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34657 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34660 \begin_layout Itemize
34661 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34662 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34663 outside of mathematics environments
34666 \begin_layout Itemize
34667 Search may be widened to a specific
34672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34676 \begin_inset space ~
34679 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34680 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34687 \begin_layout Itemize
34688 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34689 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34694 \begin_inset space ~
34697 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34700 \begin_layout Subsection
34704 \begin_layout Standard
34705 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34707 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34720 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34723 ) or the toolbar button
34726 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34732 Advanced Find and Replace
34737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34741 \begin_layout Standard
34747 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34751 \begin_inset space ~
34756 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34759 arg "paragraph-break"
34763 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34764 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34768 arg "paragraph-break"
34771 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34775 searches backwards.
34778 \begin_layout Standard
34782 \begin_inset space ~
34787 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34796 \begin_inset space ~
34801 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34805 Searching for mathematics
34808 \begin_layout Standard
34809 Mathematical formulas, such as
34810 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34813 or something more complex like
34814 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34817 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34822 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34823 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34824 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34825 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34835 \begin_layout Standard
34836 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34837 This is done by switching to the
34841 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34846 This way, entering in the
34853 \begin_layout Itemize
34854 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34855 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34858 \begin_layout Itemize
34859 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34860 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34863 \begin_layout Itemize
34864 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34865 of it only within section headings.
34866 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34867 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34871 \begin_layout Itemize
34872 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34873 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34880 \begin_layout Standard
34881 The entries made in the
34885 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34888 \begin_inset space ~
34894 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34898 button or alternatively press
34901 arg "paragraph-break"
34908 while the cursor is in the
34911 \begin_inset space ~
34919 \begin_layout Standard
34920 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34922 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34926 \begin_layout Itemize
34927 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34928 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34936 with its typewriter version
34937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34951 \begin_layout Itemize
34952 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34958 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34970 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34977 (you may want to enable the
34980 \begin_inset space ~
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34993 options and disable the
35001 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35009 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35010 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35014 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35017 , or occurrences of
35018 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35022 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35028 \begin_layout Subsection
35032 \begin_layout Standard
35033 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35038 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35040 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35042 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35052 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35058 This is done with the context menu
35060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35061 Insert Regular Expression
35063 while the cursor is in the
35068 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35069 expression matching rules
35073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35074 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35084 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35085 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35091 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35092 same text in the document.
35093 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35094 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35097 \begin_layout Enumerate
35098 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35103 editor the fraction
35104 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35108 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35111 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35112 fractions with the given denominator.
35115 \begin_layout Enumerate
35116 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35128 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35133 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35134 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35135 Also, by inserting a
35136 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35139 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35140 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35143 \begin_layout Standard
35144 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35145 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35146 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35149 , and referring back to them through
35150 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35154 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35158 For example, try searching with the regexp
35159 \begin_inset Newline newline
35162 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35165 \begin_inset Newline newline
35168 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35171 \begin_layout Standard
35172 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35175 \begin_layout Standard
35176 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35184 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35185 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35186 sub-expressions is absolute.
35188 \begin_inset space ~
35192 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35195 always refers to the first occurrence of
35196 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35199 in all entered regexps.
35207 \begin_layout Section
35209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35211 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35216 \begin_inset Index idx
35219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35228 \begin_layout Standard
35230 has a built-in spell checker.
35233 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35240 key or the toolbar button
35243 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35246 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35247 beginning of the currently selected text.
35248 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35249 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35250 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35251 scrolled so that it is visible.
35252 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35253 n, if any could be found.
35254 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35258 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35259 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35262 \begin_layout Standard
35263 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35270 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35271 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35273 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35274 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35285 arg "dialog-show character"
35288 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35290 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35293 \begin_layout Standard
35294 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35295 can be downloaded from here:
35296 \begin_inset Newline newline
35300 \begin_inset Flex URL
35303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35305 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35311 \begin_inset Newline newline
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35318 files for each language.
35319 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35320 \begin_inset space ~
35323 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35324 's installation subfolder
35332 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35334 \begin_inset Newline newline
35337 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35338 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35339 but in most cases these are
35355 is the language code.
35358 \begin_layout Subsection
35362 \begin_layout Standard
35365 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35366 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35371 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35374 you can set the following things:
35377 \begin_layout Description
35379 \begin_inset space ~
35382 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35383 should use for spell checking.
35384 Depending on your platform,
35394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35395 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35396 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35414 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35417 \begin_layout Description
35419 \begin_inset space ~
35422 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35423 will always use the given language
35424 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35427 \begin_layout Description
35429 \begin_inset space ~
35432 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35438 \begin_inset space \space{}
35442 This should normally not be needed.
35445 \begin_layout Description
35447 \begin_inset space ~
35451 \begin_inset space ~
35454 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35466 \begin_layout Description
35468 \begin_inset space ~
35471 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35472 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35473 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35474 appear in a context menu.
35475 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35479 \begin_layout Description
35481 \begin_inset space ~
35485 \begin_inset space ~
35489 \begin_inset space ~
35492 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35496 \begin_layout Section
35498 \begin_inset Index idx
35501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35510 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35517 \begin_layout Standard
35519 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35520 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35530 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35532 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35542 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35544 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35545 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35546 which are available for many languages.
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35551 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35555 \begin_layout Subsection
35556 Setting up the thesaurus
35559 \begin_layout Standard
35568 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35572 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35577 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35583 \begin_inset space ~
35591 For instance, the US English files are named:
35594 \begin_layout Itemize
35598 \begin_layout Itemize
35602 \begin_layout Standard
35611 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35612 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35615 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35616 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35617 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35624 ) to the path where they are installed.
35628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35629 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35630 ies, typical locations are
35636 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35640 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35644 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35647 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35653 LibreOffice-<Version>
35660 On the Mac, the default location is
35662 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35663 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35664 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35665 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35666 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35667 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35675 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35676 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35677 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35681 \begin_layout Standard
35682 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35683 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35685 \begin_inset Newline newline
35689 \begin_inset Flex URL
35692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35694 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
35702 \begin_layout Standard
35703 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35704 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35706 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35707 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35708 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35715 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35717 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35718 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35722 \begin_layout Standard
35723 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35725 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35728 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35734 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35737 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35738 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35746 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35747 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35748 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35750 \begin_inset space ~
35755 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35758 \begin_layout Subsection
35759 Using the thesaurus
35762 \begin_layout Standard
35763 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35765 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35768 or the toolbar button
35771 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35774 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35776 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35778 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35779 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35780 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35789 ), related terms (such as
35792 \begin_inset space ~
35801 ), compounds (such as
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35813 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35822 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35825 \begin_layout Standard
35826 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35827 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35831 \begin_layout Standard
35832 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35833 the dictionary, such as the above
35837 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35842 \begin_inset space \space{}
35845 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35846 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35847 For example, looking up the word form
35851 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35856 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35861 \begin_inset space \space{}
35872 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35873 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35874 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35877 \begin_layout Section
35879 \begin_inset Index idx
35882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35889 \begin_inset Index idx
35892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35893 Document ! Change Tracking
35899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35901 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35908 \begin_layout Standard
35909 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35910 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35911 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35912 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35914 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35919 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_layout Standard
35930 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35944 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35945 You can change the color in
35947 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35948 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35959 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35965 \begin_inset Index idx
35968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35969 Color ! Change tracking
35974 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35975 's status bar when the
35976 cursor is in changed text.
35977 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35980 arg "changes-merge"
35986 \begin_layout Standard
35987 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35989 \begin_inset Index idx
35992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36001 \begin_layout Standard
36002 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36008 \begin_layout Standard
36009 \begin_inset Graphics
36010 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36018 \begin_layout Standard
36019 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36025 \begin_layout Standard
36026 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36029 \begin_layout Standard
36030 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36036 \begin_layout Standard
36037 \begin_inset Tabular
36038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36039 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36040 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36041 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36051 arg "changes-track"
36059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36070 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36072 \begin_inset space ~
36081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36090 arg "changes-output"
36098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36106 \begin_inset space ~
36109 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36115 \begin_inset space ~
36119 \begin_inset space ~
36128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36149 Jumps to the next change
36155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36164 arg "change-accept"
36172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36180 \begin_inset space ~
36183 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36203 arg "change-reject"
36211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36217 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36219 \begin_inset space ~
36222 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36224 \begin_inset space ~
36233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36242 arg "changes-merge"
36250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36258 \begin_inset space ~
36261 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36272 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36281 arg "all-changes-accept"
36289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36297 \begin_inset space ~
36300 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36302 \begin_inset space ~
36306 \begin_inset space ~
36315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36324 arg "all-changes-reject"
36332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36343 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36358 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36382 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36384 \begin_inset space ~
36393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36416 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_layout Standard
36435 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36441 \begin_layout Standard
36442 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36464 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36465 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36466 the next change after the current cursor position.
36467 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36468 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36469 step to the next change.
36470 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36473 \begin_layout Standard
36474 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36475 to describe a change.
36478 \begin_layout Standard
36479 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36485 \begin_inset Index idx
36488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36496 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36498 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36505 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36509 \begin_layout Section
36510 Comparison of Documents
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36513 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36518 \begin_inset Index idx
36521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36522 Comparison of documents
36530 \begin_layout Standard
36531 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36534 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36538 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36539 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36541 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36543 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36547 \begin_inset space ~
36551 \begin_inset space ~
36555 \begin_inset space ~
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36568 \begin_inset space ~
36572 \begin_inset space ~
36576 \begin_inset space ~
36580 \begin_inset space ~
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36589 enables the change tracking option
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36596 \begin_inset space ~
36600 \begin_inset space ~
36605 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36608 \begin_layout Section
36609 International Support
36610 \begin_inset Index idx
36613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36614 International support
36622 \begin_layout Standard
36623 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36624 with any language you want.
36625 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36626 up \SpecialChar LyX
36628 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36630 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36638 \begin_layout Standard
36639 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36640 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36647 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36654 \begin_layout Subsection
36656 \begin_inset Index idx
36659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36666 \begin_inset Index idx
36669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36670 Document ! Settings
36676 \begin_inset Index idx
36679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36680 Document ! Language
36688 \begin_layout Standard
36691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36692 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36695 dialog lets you set
36697 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36702 \begin_layout Standard
36707 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36712 \begin_inset space ~
36717 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36718 For details about the different encoding options see section
36719 \begin_inset space ~
36723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36725 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36732 \begin_layout Subsection
36733 Keyboard mapping configuration
36734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36736 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36743 \begin_layout Standard
36744 If you have for example a U.
36745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36748 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36749 can use an alternate keymap.
36750 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36755 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36756 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36757 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36760 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36767 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36772 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36773 which one you want to use.
36776 \begin_layout Standard
36777 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36778 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36779 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36783 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36784 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36785 one to support the characters you want.
36786 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36793 \begin_layout Chapter
36796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36798 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36807 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36808 topic inside the user's guide.
36811 \begin_layout Section
36813 \begin_inset Index idx
36816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36830 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36833 \begin_layout Subsection
36837 \begin_layout Standard
36838 Creates a new document.
36841 \begin_layout Subsection
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36846 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36847 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36848 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36851 \begin_layout Subsection
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36859 \begin_layout Subsection
36863 \begin_layout Standard
36864 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36865 Click there on a file to open it.
36868 \begin_layout Subsection
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36873 Closes the current document.
36876 \begin_layout Subsection
36880 \begin_layout Standard
36881 Closes all opened documents.
36884 \begin_layout Subsection
36888 \begin_layout Standard
36889 Saves the actual document.
36892 \begin_layout Subsection
36896 \begin_layout Standard
36897 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36900 \begin_layout Subsection
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36905 Saves all opened documents.
36908 \begin_layout Subsection
36912 \begin_layout Standard
36913 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36916 \begin_layout Subsection
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36922 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36923 It is described in the section
36925 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36930 Additional Features
36935 \begin_layout Subsection
36939 \begin_layout Standard
36940 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36941 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36943 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36944 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36949 When using the menu entry
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36957 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36961 \begin_inset space ~
36965 \begin_inset space ~
36969 \begin_inset space ~
36974 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36975 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36978 \begin_layout Subsection
36980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36982 name "subsec:Export"
36989 \begin_layout Standard
36990 You can export your document to various file formats.
36991 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36993 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36994 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36995 during its configuration.
36998 \begin_layout Standard
36999 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37001 \begin_inset space ~
37005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37007 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37014 \begin_layout Description
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37023 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37028 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37029 \begin_inset Newline newline
37032 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37033 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37037 \begin_layout Description
37038 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37044 \begin_layout Description
37046 \begin_inset space ~
37049 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37055 \begin_layout Description
37056 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37057 's native DVI-format.
37058 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37059 files paths or file names in your document.
37061 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37068 \begin_layout Description
37069 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37070 in files paths or file names
37073 \begin_layout Description
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37082 ) DVI-format using the program
37084 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37087 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37091 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37099 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37107 \begin_layout Description
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37112 (cropped) the same as
37116 but with cropped page margins.
37119 \begin_layout Description
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37124 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37128 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37133 \begin_layout Description
37137 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37145 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37153 \begin_layout Description
37155 \begin_inset space ~
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37162 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37166 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37174 \begin_layout Description
37178 \begin_inset space ~
37187 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37188 source that is compilable with the program
37190 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37194 \begin_layout Description
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37203 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37204 source, additionally all images used in the document
37205 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37209 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37212 \begin_layout Description
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37221 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37222 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37223 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37231 \begin_layout Description
37235 \begin_inset space ~
37244 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37245 source that is compilable with the program
37251 \begin_layout Description
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37264 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37265 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37271 \begin_layout Description
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37276 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37277 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37283 \begin_inset space \space{}
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37307 represent the version number)
37310 \begin_layout Description
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37316 \begin_inset space ~
37319 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37320 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37321 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37325 \begin_layout Description
37326 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37327 's internal XHTML engine
37330 \begin_layout Description
37332 \begin_inset space ~
37336 \begin_inset space ~
37340 \begin_inset space ~
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37347 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37352 For the conversion the program
37361 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37364 \begin_layout Description
37365 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37370 \begin_layout Description
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37375 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37377 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37380 For the conversion the program
37389 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37392 \begin_layout Description
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37397 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37398 For the conversion the program
37407 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37410 \begin_layout Description
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37415 (cropped) the same as
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37423 but with cropped page margins
37426 \begin_layout Description
37430 \begin_inset space ~
37435 PDF-format using the program
37439 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37442 \begin_layout Description
37446 \begin_inset space ~
37450 \begin_inset space ~
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37463 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37468 \begin_inset space \space{}
37471 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37475 \begin_layout Description
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37484 PDF-format using the program
37486 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37489 , produces PDF-files directly
37492 \begin_layout Description
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37501 PDF-format using the program
37505 , produces PDF-files directly
37508 \begin_layout Description
37512 \begin_inset space ~
37517 PDF-format using the program
37521 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37524 \begin_layout Description
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37533 PDF-format using the program
37538 , produces PDF-files directly
37541 \begin_layout Description
37545 \begin_inset space ~
37553 \begin_layout Description
37557 \begin_inset space ~
37561 \begin_inset space ~
37566 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37567 and then exported as text using the program
37572 \begin_layout Description
37577 PostScript format using the program
37585 options see section
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37592 reference "subsec:General-output"
37599 \begin_layout Description
37600 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37601 source and also code in the statistical programming
37615 it is possible to use
37619 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37623 \begin_layout Standard
37624 If one of the menu entries
37631 \begin_inset space ~
37640 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37642 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37650 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37655 \begin_inset Index idx
37658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37659 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37668 \begin_layout Subsection
37672 \begin_layout Standard
37673 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37674 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37677 \begin_inset space ~
37681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37683 reference "sec:Paths"
37688 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37697 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37698 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37699 's preferences as described in section
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37706 reference "subsec:Converters"
37713 \begin_layout Subsection
37714 New and Close Window
37717 \begin_layout Standard
37718 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37722 \begin_layout Subsection
37726 \begin_layout Standard
37727 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37730 \begin_layout Section
37732 \begin_inset Index idx
37735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37744 \begin_layout Subsection
37748 \begin_layout Standard
37749 Described in section
37750 \begin_inset space ~
37754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37756 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37763 \begin_layout Subsection
37764 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37767 \begin_layout Standard
37768 Described in section
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37775 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37782 \begin_layout Subsection
37786 \begin_layout Standard
37787 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37788 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37791 \begin_layout Subsection
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 Selects the whole document.
37799 \begin_layout Subsection
37800 Find & Replace (Quick)
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 Described in section
37805 \begin_inset space ~
37809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37811 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37818 \begin_layout Subsection
37819 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37822 \begin_layout Standard
37823 Described in section
37824 \begin_inset space ~
37828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37830 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37837 \begin_layout Subsection
37838 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37841 \begin_layout Standard
37842 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37846 \begin_layout Subsection
37850 \begin_layout Standard
37851 Described in section
37852 \begin_inset space ~
37856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37858 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37865 \begin_layout Subsection
37867 \begin_inset Index idx
37870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37871 Paragraph ! Settings
37879 \begin_layout Standard
37880 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37881 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37885 \begin_layout Standard
37886 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37887 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37894 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37896 \begin_inset space ~
37904 \begin_layout Subsection
37905 Table and Rows & Columns
37908 \begin_layout Standard
37909 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37910 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37911 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37914 \begin_layout Subsection
37918 \begin_layout Standard
37919 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37920 It will dissolve this inset.
37921 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37925 \begin_layout Subsection
37929 \begin_layout Standard
37930 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37931 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37934 \begin_layout Subsection
37935 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37938 \begin_layout Standard
37939 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37941 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37942 \begin_inset space ~
37946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37948 reference "sec:Nesting"
37953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37955 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37962 \begin_layout Subsection
37965 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37968 \begin_layout Standard
37969 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37970 nts of the same type.
37972 \begin_inset space ~
37976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37978 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37982 for an explanation.
37985 \begin_layout Section
37987 \begin_inset Index idx
37990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37999 \begin_layout Standard
38000 At the bottom of the
38004 menu the opened documents are listed.
38007 \begin_layout Subsection
38008 Open/Close all Insets
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38012 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38015 \begin_layout Subsection
38016 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38019 \begin_layout Standard
38020 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38023 \begin_layout Standard
38024 Math macros are described in the
38031 \begin_layout Subsection
38035 \begin_layout Standard
38036 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38037 \begin_inset space ~
38041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38043 reference "sec:Navigating"
38048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38050 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38057 \begin_layout Subsection
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38064 \begin_inset space ~
38068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38070 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38077 \begin_layout Subsection
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38082 Opens a window showing console messages.
38083 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38088 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38089 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38090 is processing the document.
38093 \begin_layout Subsection
38095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38097 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38102 \begin_inset Index idx
38105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38114 \begin_layout Standard
38115 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38117 All toolbars and the
38120 \begin_inset space ~
38125 can be turned on and off.
38130 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38142 \begin_inset space ~
38154 \begin_inset space ~
38159 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38163 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38170 \begin_layout Standard
38175 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38179 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38180 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38181 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38182 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38183 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38186 \begin_layout Standard
38188 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38189 \begin_inset space ~
38193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38195 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38202 \begin_layout Subsection
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38210 \begin_inset space ~
38214 \begin_inset space ~
38218 \begin_inset space ~
38222 \begin_inset space ~
38226 \begin_inset space ~
38230 \begin_inset space ~
38235 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38236 's main window vertically while
38239 \begin_inset space ~
38243 \begin_inset space ~
38247 \begin_inset space ~
38251 \begin_inset space ~
38255 \begin_inset space ~
38259 \begin_inset space ~
38264 will split it horizontally.
38265 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38266 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38267 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38268 three or more documents at the same time.
38269 To close a split view, use the menu
38272 \begin_inset space ~
38276 \begin_inset space ~
38284 \begin_layout Subsection
38288 \begin_layout Standard
38289 Closes a split view.
38292 \begin_layout Subsection
38296 \begin_layout Standard
38297 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38298 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38299 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38300 's main window fullscreen.
38301 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38302 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38305 \begin_layout Section
38307 \begin_inset Index idx
38310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38319 \begin_layout Subsection
38323 \begin_layout Standard
38324 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38325 \begin_inset space ~
38329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38331 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38342 \begin_layout Subsection
38344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38346 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38353 \begin_layout Standard
38354 Here you can insert the following characters:
38357 \begin_layout Description
38362 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38365 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38366 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38367 -packages you have installed.
38368 You can get a complete display by checking
38371 \begin_inset space ~
38377 \begin_inset Newline newline
38381 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38389 Not all characters will be visible in the
38393 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38394 dialog (see section
38395 \begin_inset space ~
38399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38401 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38405 ) can display every character.
38413 \begin_layout Description
38414 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38418 \begin_layout Description
38420 \begin_inset space ~
38424 \begin_inset space ~
38427 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38428 \begin_inset space ~
38432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38434 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38441 \begin_layout Description
38443 \begin_inset space ~
38446 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38456 \begin_layout Description
38458 \begin_inset space ~
38461 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38465 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38471 \begin_layout Description
38473 \begin_inset space ~
38476 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38480 \begin_layout Description
38482 \begin_inset space ~
38485 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38489 \begin_layout Description
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38494 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38500 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38506 \begin_layout Description
38508 \begin_inset space ~
38511 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38515 \begin_layout Description
38517 \begin_inset space ~
38521 \begin_inset Index idx
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38531 \begin_inset Index idx
38534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38535 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38540 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38541 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38543 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38549 \begin_inset Index idx
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38560 \begin_inset Newline newline
38563 More information about this feature can be found in the
38569 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38575 \begin_layout Description
38576 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38578 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38579 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38583 \begin_layout Subsection
38587 \begin_layout Standard
38588 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38591 \begin_layout Description
38592 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38593 \begin_inset script superscript
38595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38604 \begin_layout Description
38605 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38606 \begin_inset script subscript
38608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 \begin_layout Description
38619 \begin_inset space ~
38622 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38623 \begin_inset space ~
38627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38629 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38636 \begin_layout Description
38638 \begin_inset space ~
38641 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38642 \begin_inset space ~
38646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38648 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38655 \begin_layout Description
38657 \begin_inset space ~
38660 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38661 \begin_inset space ~
38665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38667 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38674 \begin_layout Description
38676 \begin_inset space ~
38679 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38685 \begin_inset space \space{}
38688 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38689 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38698 To insert a fraction use the command
38703 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38707 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38716 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38723 \begin_layout Description
38725 \begin_inset space ~
38728 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38729 \begin_inset space ~
38733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38735 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38742 \begin_layout Description
38744 \begin_inset space ~
38747 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38748 \begin_inset space ~
38752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38754 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38761 \begin_layout Description
38763 \begin_inset space ~
38766 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38773 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38780 \begin_layout Description
38781 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38782 \begin_inset space ~
38786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38788 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38795 \begin_layout Description
38797 \begin_inset space ~
38800 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38801 \begin_inset space ~
38805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38807 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38814 \begin_layout Description
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38819 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38820 \begin_inset space ~
38824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38826 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38833 \begin_layout Description
38835 \begin_inset space ~
38839 \begin_inset space ~
38842 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38845 \begin_inset space ~
38849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38851 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38858 for a usage example.
38861 \begin_layout Description
38863 \begin_inset space ~
38867 \begin_inset space ~
38870 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38871 \begin_inset space ~
38875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38877 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38884 \begin_layout Description
38886 \begin_inset space ~
38889 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38890 as described in section
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38897 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38904 \begin_layout Description
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38909 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38910 \begin_inset space ~
38914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38916 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38923 \begin_layout Description
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38928 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38929 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38931 \begin_inset space ~
38935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38937 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38944 \begin_layout Description
38946 \begin_inset space ~
38949 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38950 \begin_inset space ~
38954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38956 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38963 \begin_layout Description
38965 \begin_inset space ~
38969 \begin_inset space ~
38972 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38973 \begin_inset space ~
38977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38979 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38986 \begin_layout Subsection
38990 \begin_layout Standard
38991 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38995 \begin_inset space ~
39016 are described in section
39017 \begin_inset space ~
39021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39023 reference "sec:toc"
39032 is described in section
39033 \begin_inset space ~
39037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39039 reference "sec:Index"
39047 is described in section
39048 \begin_inset space ~
39052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39054 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39060 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39063 is described in section
39064 \begin_inset space ~
39068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39070 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39077 \begin_layout Subsection
39081 \begin_layout Standard
39082 To insert floats, as described in section
39083 \begin_inset space ~
39087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39089 reference "sec:Floats"
39093 and in detail the chapter
39100 \begin_inset space ~
39108 \begin_layout Subsection
39112 \begin_layout Standard
39113 To insert notes, described in section
39114 \begin_inset space ~
39118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39120 reference "sec:Notes"
39127 \begin_layout Subsection
39131 \begin_layout Standard
39132 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39134 Branches are described in section
39135 \begin_inset space ~
39139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39141 reference "sec:Branches"
39148 \begin_layout Subsection
39152 \begin_layout Standard
39153 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39154 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39156 An example is the document class
39157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39164 with three custom insets.
39167 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39171 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39177 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39180 \begin_layout Subsection
39182 \begin_inset Index idx
39185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39194 \begin_layout Standard
39195 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39197 For more information see chapter
39199 External Document Parts
39202 \begin_inset space ~
39208 \begin_layout Subsection
39210 \begin_inset Index idx
39213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39222 \begin_layout Standard
39223 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39224 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39239 \begin_layout Subsection
39243 \begin_layout Standard
39248 dialog as described in section
39249 \begin_inset space ~
39253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39255 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39262 \begin_layout Subsection
39266 \begin_layout Standard
39271 as described in section
39272 \begin_inset space ~
39276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39278 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39285 \begin_layout Subsection
39289 \begin_layout Standard
39294 as described in section
39295 \begin_inset space ~
39299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39301 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39308 \begin_layout Subsection
39310 \begin_inset Index idx
39313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39320 \begin_inset Index idx
39323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39332 \begin_layout Standard
39333 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39334 Floats are described in section
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39341 reference "sec:Floats"
39345 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39347 Multi-page Captions
39352 \begin_inset space ~
39360 \begin_layout Subsection
39364 \begin_layout Standard
39365 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39366 \begin_inset space ~
39370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39372 reference "sec:Index"
39379 \begin_layout Subsection
39383 \begin_layout Standard
39384 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39385 \begin_inset space ~
39389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39391 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39398 \begin_layout Subsection
39402 \begin_layout Standard
39403 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39404 Tables are described in section
39405 \begin_inset space ~
39409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39411 reference "sec:Tables"
39415 and in detail in the chapter
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39430 \begin_layout Subsection
39434 \begin_layout Standard
39440 Graphics are described in section
39441 \begin_inset space ~
39445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39447 reference "sec:Graphics"
39454 \begin_layout Subsection
39458 \begin_layout Standard
39459 Inserts a URL as described in section
39460 \begin_inset space ~
39464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39466 reference "subsec:URLs"
39473 \begin_layout Subsection
39477 \begin_layout Standard
39478 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39479 \begin_inset space ~
39483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39485 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39492 \begin_layout Subsection
39496 \begin_layout Standard
39497 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39498 \begin_inset space ~
39502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39504 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39511 \begin_layout Subsection
39515 \begin_layout Standard
39516 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39523 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39530 \begin_layout Subsection
39534 \begin_layout Standard
39535 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39536 title or caption of a float.
39537 Inserts a short title as described in section
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39544 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39551 \begin_layout Subsection
39556 \begin_layout Standard
39557 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39558 Code box as described in section
39559 \begin_inset space ~
39563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39565 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39572 \begin_layout Subsection
39574 \begin_inset Index idx
39577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39586 \begin_layout Standard
39587 Inserts a program listings box.
39588 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39590 Program Code Listings
39595 \begin_inset space ~
39603 \begin_layout Subsection
39607 \begin_layout Standard
39608 Inserts the actual date.
39609 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39614 \begin_layout Subsection
39618 \begin_layout Standard
39619 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39620 \begin_inset space ~
39624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39626 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39633 \begin_layout Section
39635 \begin_inset Index idx
39638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39647 \begin_layout Standard
39648 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39649 \begin_inset space ~
39652 of the current document.
39653 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39656 \begin_layout Subsection
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39661 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39662 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39663 to jump, for example, between section
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39668 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39672 2.5 and use the submenu
39675 \begin_inset space ~
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39686 \begin_inset space ~
39692 \begin_inset space ~
39696 \begin_inset space ~
39702 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39706 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39712 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39715 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39718 \begin_layout Standard
39719 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39723 \begin_inset space ~
39728 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39731 \begin_inset space ~
39736 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39739 \begin_layout Subsection
39740 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39743 \begin_layout Standard
39744 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39748 \begin_layout Subsection
39752 \begin_layout Standard
39753 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39754 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39755 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39759 \begin_inset space ~
39763 \begin_inset space ~
39771 \begin_layout Subsection
39775 \begin_layout Standard
39776 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39779 The \SpecialChar LyX
39780 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39782 \begin_inset space ~
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39795 manual for a detailed description.
39798 \begin_layout Section
39800 \begin_inset Index idx
39803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39812 \begin_layout Subsection
39816 \begin_layout Standard
39817 Change Tracking is described in section
39818 \begin_inset space ~
39822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39824 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39831 \begin_layout Subsection
39839 \begin_layout Standard
39840 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39841 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39842 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39844 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39845 to the clipboard or update the view.
39846 \begin_inset Newline newline
39849 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39853 \begin_layout Standard
39856 Open Containing Directory
39858 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39859 's temporary folder for the document.
39860 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39861 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39862 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39863 For example some journals require to send the
39867 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39871 \begin_layout Subsection
39872 Start Appendix Here
39875 \begin_layout Standard
39876 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39877 as described in section
39878 \begin_inset space ~
39882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39884 reference "sec:Appendices"
39891 \begin_layout Subsection
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39899 \begin_layout Standard
39900 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39901 default output format for the document (menu
39903 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39904 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39905 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39907 \begin_inset space ~
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39923 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39927 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39930 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39931 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39933 \begin_inset space ~
39936 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39941 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39947 \begin_inset space ~
39953 \begin_inset space ~
39957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39959 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39963 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39964 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39966 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39967 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39969 \begin_inset space ~
39972 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39974 \begin_inset space ~
39977 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39981 \begin_inset space ~
39985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39987 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39992 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39993 when it is first configured.
39994 The default output format is
39997 \begin_inset space ~
40005 \begin_layout Subsection
40006 View (Other Formats)
40009 \begin_layout Standard
40010 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40011 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40012 actual document with an external program.
40013 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40014 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40015 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40017 All possible formats are listed in section
40018 \begin_inset space ~
40022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40024 reference "subsec:Export"
40029 You should at least see the menu entry
40034 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40036 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40038 \begin_inset space ~
40042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40044 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40049 \begin_inset Index idx
40052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40053 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40062 \begin_layout Standard
40063 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40064 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40066 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40067 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40072 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40077 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40081 \begin_inset space ~
40085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40087 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40092 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40093 when it is first configured.
40096 \begin_layout Subsection
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40104 \begin_layout Standard
40105 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40106 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40109 \begin_layout Subsection
40110 Update (Other Formats)
40113 \begin_layout Standard
40114 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40115 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40118 \begin_layout Subsection
40119 View Master Document
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40123 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40144 manual for more information on this topic).
40145 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40146 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40154 \begin_inset space ~
40159 generates the output of the whole book, while
40163 will just output the chapter alone.
40166 \begin_layout Standard
40167 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40168 in the document settings (menu
40170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40171 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40172 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40178 \begin_inset space ~
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40190 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40194 ) or in the preferences (menu
40196 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40197 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40202 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40204 \begin_inset space ~
40207 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40209 \begin_inset space ~
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40219 \begin_inset space ~
40223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40225 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40232 \begin_layout Subsection
40233 Update Master Document
40236 \begin_layout Standard
40237 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40253 \begin_inset space ~
40258 manual for more information on this topic).
40259 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40260 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40263 \begin_layout Standard
40264 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40265 in the document settings (menu
40267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40268 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40269 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40281 \begin_inset space ~
40285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40287 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40291 ) or in the preferences (menu
40293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40294 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40296 \begin_inset space ~
40299 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40304 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40306 \begin_inset space ~
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40316 \begin_inset space ~
40320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40322 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40329 \begin_layout Subsection
40331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40333 name "subsec:Compressed"
40340 \begin_layout Standard
40341 Un/compresses the current document.
40342 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40343 compression (see the
40345 Additional Features
40347 manual for details).
40350 \begin_layout Subsection
40354 \begin_layout Standard
40355 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40358 \begin_layout Subsection
40362 \begin_layout Standard
40363 The document settings are described in appendix
40364 \begin_inset space ~
40368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40370 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40377 \begin_layout Section
40379 \begin_inset Index idx
40382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40391 \begin_layout Subsection
40395 \begin_layout Standard
40396 Spell checking is explained in section
40397 \begin_inset space ~
40401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40403 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40410 \begin_layout Subsection
40414 \begin_layout Standard
40415 The thesaurus is described in section
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40422 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40429 \begin_layout Subsection
40431 \begin_inset Index idx
40434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40441 \begin_inset Index idx
40444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40453 \begin_layout Standard
40454 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40455 the highlighted document part.
40458 \begin_layout Subsection
40464 \begin_inset Index idx
40467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40477 \begin_layout Standard
40478 Generates with the help of the program
40480 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40483 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40484 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40485 This feature is not available on Windows.
40488 \begin_layout Subsection
40494 \begin_inset Index idx
40497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40507 \begin_layout Standard
40508 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40513 \begin_inset space ~
40518 to see the full filename paths.
40521 \begin_layout Subsection
40523 \begin_inset Index idx
40526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40535 \begin_layout Standard
40536 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40537 files as described in section
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40544 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40551 \begin_layout Subsection
40553 \begin_inset Index idx
40556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40569 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40587 \begin_inset Index idx
40590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40591 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40600 \begin_layout Standard
40601 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40602 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40603 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40604 -packages and programs it needs; see
40606 \begin_inset space ~
40610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40612 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40619 \begin_layout Subsection
40623 \begin_layout Standard
40628 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40629 \begin_inset space ~
40633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40635 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40642 \begin_layout Section
40644 \begin_inset Index idx
40647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40656 \begin_layout Standard
40657 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40658 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40660 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40664 \begin_layout Standard
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40673 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40674 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40675 packages and classes found
40676 by \SpecialChar LyX
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40684 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40691 \begin_layout Standard
40695 \begin_inset space ~
40700 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40705 \begin_layout Section
40707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40709 name "sec:Toolbars"
40716 \begin_layout Standard
40717 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40724 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40731 \begin_layout Standard
40732 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40733 This is described in the
40735 Additional Features
40740 \begin_layout Subsection
40742 \begin_inset Index idx
40745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40754 \begin_layout Standard
40755 \begin_inset Graphics
40756 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40764 \begin_layout Standard
40765 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40771 \begin_layout Standard
40772 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40789 \begin_inset Note Note
40792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40793 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40798 manual for more information.
40806 \begin_layout Standard
40807 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40813 \begin_layout Standard
40814 \begin_inset Tabular
40815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40816 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40824 \begin_inset Graphics
40825 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40839 pull-down box for the environments
40852 \begin_layout Standard
40853 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40859 \begin_layout Standard
40861 \begin_inset Tabular
40862 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40863 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40864 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40865 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40866 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40889 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40896 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40919 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40949 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40965 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40979 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40995 arg "spelling-continuously"
41003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41007 Spellcheck continuously
41013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41036 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41066 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41096 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41126 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41156 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41172 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41186 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41212 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41226 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41254 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41268 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41269 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41297 Emphasize text, function of the
41299 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41304 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41334 Set text to noun style, function of the
41336 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41341 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41359 arg "textstyle-apply"
41367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 Format text using the current settings in the
41373 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41378 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41411 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41422 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41431 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41459 arg "tabular-insert"
41467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41489 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41501 Toggle outline window on/off,
41503 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41519 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41531 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41546 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41558 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41571 \begin_layout Subsection
41573 \begin_inset Index idx
41576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41585 \begin_layout Standard
41586 \begin_inset Graphics
41587 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41595 \begin_layout Standard
41596 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41602 \begin_layout Standard
41603 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41607 \begin_layout Standard
41608 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41614 \begin_layout Standard
41615 \begin_inset Tabular
41616 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41617 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41618 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41619 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41647 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41656 arg "layout Enumerate"
41664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41683 arg "layout Itemize"
41691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41737 arg "layout Description"
41745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41764 arg "depth-increment"
41772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41780 \begin_inset space ~
41784 \begin_inset space ~
41793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 arg "depth-decrement"
41810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41816 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41840 arg "float-insert figure"
41848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41855 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41871 arg "float-insert table"
41879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41886 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41893 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41923 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41932 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41962 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41976 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41983 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42008 \begin_inset space ~
42017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42026 arg "nomencl-insert"
42034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42042 \begin_inset space ~
42051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42060 arg "footnote-insert"
42068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42090 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42106 \begin_inset space ~
42115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42139 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42141 \begin_inset space ~
42150 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42180 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42235 \begin_inset space ~
42244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42253 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42268 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42284 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42299 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42319 arg "dialog-show character"
42327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42333 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42335 \begin_inset space ~
42338 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42354 arg "layout-paragraph"
42362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42368 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42370 \begin_inset space ~
42379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42388 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42416 \begin_layout Subsection
42417 View/Update Toolbar
42418 \begin_inset Index idx
42421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42422 Toolbar ! View / Update
42430 \begin_layout Standard
42431 \begin_inset Graphics
42432 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42439 \begin_layout Standard
42440 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42446 \begin_layout Standard
42447 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42451 \begin_layout Standard
42452 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42458 \begin_layout Standard
42459 \begin_inset Tabular
42460 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42461 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42462 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42463 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42503 arg "buffer-update"
42511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42524 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42533 arg "master-buffer-view"
42541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42567 arg "master-buffer-update"
42575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42587 \begin_inset space ~
42596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42605 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42620 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42621 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42622 Synchronize with Output
42628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42652 View (Other Formats)
42658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42665 arg "update-others"
42673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42680 Update (Other Formats)
42693 \begin_layout Standard
42694 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42698 \begin_layout Subsection
42702 \begin_layout Standard
42703 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42704 \begin_inset space ~
42708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42710 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42714 , the table toolbar
42715 \begin_inset Index idx
42718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42727 \begin_inset space ~
42732 manual and the math macro toolbar
42733 \begin_inset Index idx
42736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42749 \begin_layout Chapter
42750 The Document Settings
42751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42753 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42758 \begin_inset Index idx
42761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42762 Document ! Settings
42770 \begin_layout Standard
42774 \begin_inset space ~
42779 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42780 is called with the menu
42782 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42786 You can save your document settings as default with the
42788 Save as Document Defaults
42790 button in any dialog.
42791 This will create a template named
42795 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42796 when you create a new document without
42800 \begin_layout Standard
42805 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42806 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42809 \begin_layout Standard
42810 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42811 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42812 to find the one you are looking for.
42813 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42814 the submenus of the dialog.
42816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42820 \begin_inset space \space{}
42824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42831 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42832 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42833 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42836 \begin_layout Section
42840 \begin_layout Standard
42841 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42843 Document classes are described in section
42844 \begin_inset space ~
42848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42850 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42858 \begin_layout Standard
42862 \begin_inset space ~
42867 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42872 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42873 as a layout for a document class.
42874 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42876 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42885 \begin_layout Standard
42886 Some classes use special class options by default.
42887 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42891 and you can decide to use them or not.
42892 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42893 recommended you leave them untouched.
42898 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42899 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42904 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42906 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42912 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42913 \begin_inset Newline newline
42918 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42921 \begin_inset Newline newline
42924 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42925 distribution, see section
42930 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42932 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42950 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42951 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42952 in the background if the child document
42953 is opened without its master.
42954 This way child documents are always compilable.
42955 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42962 \begin_inset space ~
42970 \begin_layout Standard
42971 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42982 \begin_inset Index idx
42985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42987 packages ! prettyref
42993 \begin_inset Index idx
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42998 packages ! refstyle
43003 for cross-references, see section
43004 \begin_inset space ~
43008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43010 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43017 \begin_layout Section
43021 \begin_layout Standard
43022 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43023 Please refer to the section
43026 \begin_inset space ~
43034 \begin_inset space ~
43039 manual for details.
43042 \begin_layout Section
43046 \begin_layout Standard
43047 Modules are explained in section
43048 \begin_inset space ~
43052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43054 reference "subsec:Modules"
43061 \begin_layout Section
43065 \begin_layout Standard
43067 \begin_inset space ~
43071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43073 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43080 \begin_layout Section
43084 \begin_layout Standard
43085 The document font settings are described in section
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43092 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43099 \begin_layout Section
43103 \begin_layout Standard
43104 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43116 \begin_inset space ~
43121 and whether it should be a
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43129 can also be specified here.
43132 \begin_layout Standard
43133 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43134 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43135 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43137 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43140 \begin_layout Standard
43143 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43146 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43147 justifies the text on screen.
43148 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43152 \begin_layout Section
43156 \begin_layout Standard
43157 This dialog is described in sections
43158 \begin_inset space ~
43162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43164 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43171 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43178 \begin_layout Section
43182 \begin_layout Standard
43183 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43184 \begin_inset space ~
43188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43190 reference "subsec:Margins"
43197 \begin_layout Section
43199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43201 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43206 \begin_inset Index idx
43209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43210 Language ! Encoding
43218 \begin_layout Standard
43219 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43220 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43221 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43223 is always encoded in utf8).
43224 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43225 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43226 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43227 -command is not known for
43228 a particular character).
43231 \begin_layout Standard
43232 If you use the option
43237 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43238 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43239 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43241 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43242 exactly one encoding.
43243 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43246 \begin_layout Standard
43248 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43249 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43250 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43251 installation supports Unicode), choose
43252 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43253 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43254 is quite incomplete, so
43255 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43260 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43261 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43262 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43263 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43264 -commands is not used, because all
43265 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43266 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43267 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43268 , two new alternative engines
43269 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43271 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43273 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43276 \begin_inset space ~
43284 \begin_inset space ~
43292 \begin_inset space ~
43298 \begin_inset space ~
43302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43304 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43309 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43313 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43316 \begin_layout Standard
43320 \begin_inset space ~
43325 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43326 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43336 The possible settings are:
43339 \begin_layout Description
43340 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43342 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43343 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43347 \begin_inset space ~
43351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43353 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43360 \begin_layout Description
43361 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43362 format you will use.
43363 In many cases this will be
43368 \begin_inset Index idx
43371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43379 If the newer package
43384 \begin_inset Index idx
43387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43389 packages ! polyglossia
43394 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43395 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43396 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43398 this package will be used instead of
43405 \begin_layout Description
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43418 would be more appropriate.
43421 \begin_layout Description
43422 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43423 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43427 (for German texts), type in
43430 \begin_inset Newline newline
43435 usepackage{ngerman}
43438 \begin_layout Description
43439 None will not use a language package.
43440 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43443 \begin_layout Standard
43444 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43447 \begin_layout Description
43449 \begin_inset space ~
43453 \begin_inset space ~
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43464 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43470 \begin_inset Index idx
43473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43475 packages ! inputenc
43481 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43482 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43483 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43487 \begin_layout Description
43488 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43490 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43491 commands, which may result in a big
43492 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43493 -commands are needed.
43496 \begin_layout Description
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43502 \begin_inset space ~
43505 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43508 \begin_layout Description
43510 \begin_inset space ~
43514 \begin_inset space ~
43517 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43520 \begin_layout Description
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43525 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43528 \begin_layout Description
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43537 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43538 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43541 \begin_layout Description
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43547 \begin_inset space ~
43550 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43554 \begin_layout Description
43556 \begin_inset space ~
43560 \begin_inset space ~
43563 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43564 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43567 \begin_layout Description
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43580 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43587 \begin_layout Description
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43593 \begin_inset space ~
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43600 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43601 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43604 \begin_layout Description
43606 \begin_inset space ~
43610 \begin_inset space ~
43613 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43614 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43615 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43616 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43617 \begin_inset space ~
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43627 \begin_layout Description
43629 \begin_inset space ~
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43636 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43637 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43638 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43640 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43641 \begin_inset space ~
43645 \begin_inset space ~
43651 \begin_layout Description
43653 \begin_inset space ~
43657 \begin_inset space ~
43660 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43663 \begin_layout Description
43665 \begin_inset space ~
43669 \begin_inset space ~
43672 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43675 \begin_layout Description
43677 \begin_inset space ~
43681 \begin_inset space ~
43684 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43687 \begin_layout Description
43689 \begin_inset space ~
43692 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43695 \begin_layout Description
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43700 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43703 \begin_layout Description
43705 \begin_inset space ~
43709 \begin_inset space ~
43712 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43715 \begin_layout Description
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43721 \begin_inset space ~
43727 \begin_layout Description
43729 \begin_inset space ~
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43736 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43739 \begin_layout Description
43741 \begin_inset space ~
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_layout Description
43753 \begin_inset space ~
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43760 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43766 \begin_inset Index idx
43769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43776 , when using this, set the document language to
43781 \begin_layout Description
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43790 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43795 , when using this, set the document language to
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_layout Description
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43813 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43819 \begin_inset Index idx
43822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43824 packages ! japanese
43829 , when using this, set the document language to
43834 \begin_layout Description
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43840 \begin_inset space ~
43843 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43848 , when using this, set the document language to
43853 \begin_layout Description
43855 \begin_inset space ~
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43862 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43867 , when using this, set the document language to
43872 \begin_layout Description
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43877 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43880 \begin_layout Description
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43886 \begin_inset space ~
43890 \begin_inset space ~
43893 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43896 \begin_layout Description
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43902 \begin_inset space ~
43906 \begin_inset space ~
43909 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43910 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43911 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43914 \begin_layout Description
43916 \begin_inset space ~
43920 \begin_inset space ~
43926 \begin_layout Description
43928 \begin_inset space ~
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43935 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43936 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43939 \begin_layout Description
43941 \begin_inset space ~
43945 \begin_inset space ~
43948 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43954 \begin_inset Index idx
43957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43964 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43967 \begin_layout Description
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43977 \begin_inset space ~
43980 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43987 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43990 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43997 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43998 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44000 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44003 \begin_layout Description
44005 \begin_inset space ~
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44012 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44018 \begin_inset Index idx
44021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44031 \begin_layout Description
44033 \begin_inset space ~
44036 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44042 \begin_inset Index idx
44045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44047 packages ! inputenc
44053 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44057 \begin_layout Description
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44063 \begin_inset space ~
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44070 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44077 \begin_layout Description
44079 \begin_inset space ~
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44087 \begin_inset space ~
44090 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44091 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44092 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44096 \begin_layout Description
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44109 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44110 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44113 \begin_layout Section
44115 \begin_inset Index idx
44118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44125 \begin_inset Index idx
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44135 \begin_inset Index idx
44138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44139 Color ! Shaded boxes
44145 \begin_inset Index idx
44148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44149 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44157 \begin_layout Standard
44158 Here you can alter the font color for the
44162 (default: black), for
44165 \begin_inset space ~
44170 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44174 (default: white) and for
44177 \begin_inset space ~
44187 sets the color back to the default.
44190 \begin_layout Standard
44191 Clicking any button showing
44199 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44200 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44201 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44202 later more quickly.
44205 \begin_layout Standard
44206 Note, if you change the
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44214 font color and use the option
44217 \begin_inset space ~
44222 in the document settings under
44225 \begin_inset space ~
44230 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44237 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44244 \begin_layout Standard
44245 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44251 \begin_layout Standard
44255 \begin_inset space ~
44264 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44270 Code after a forced page break:
44273 \begin_layout Itemize
44274 For the page color:
44275 \begin_inset Newline newline
44282 pagecolor{color name}
44285 \begin_layout Itemize
44286 For the text color:
44287 \begin_inset Newline newline
44297 \begin_layout Standard
44298 You are restricted to one of
44334 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44347 \begin_inset Newline newline
44350 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44351 names to refer to them:
44354 \begin_layout Itemize
44360 \begin_inset Newline newline
44365 page_backgroundcolor
44368 \begin_layout Itemize
44372 \begin_inset space ~
44378 \begin_inset Newline newline
44386 \begin_layout Itemize
44390 \begin_inset space ~
44396 \begin_inset Newline newline
44404 \begin_layout Itemize
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44414 \begin_inset Newline newline
44422 \begin_layout Standard
44423 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44426 \begin_inset space ~
44434 \begin_inset space ~
44442 \begin_layout Section
44446 \begin_layout Standard
44447 Here you can adjust the
44451 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44455 as described in section
44456 \begin_inset space ~
44460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44462 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44469 \begin_layout Section
44473 \begin_layout Standard
44474 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44480 \begin_inset Index idx
44483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44485 packages ! biblatex
44495 \begin_inset Index idx
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44510 \begin_inset Index idx
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44521 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44524 Sectioned bibliography
44526 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44532 \begin_inset Index idx
44535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44537 packages ! bibtopic
44547 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44548 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44552 for the generation of the bibliography.
44553 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44554 \begin_inset space ~
44558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44560 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44567 \begin_layout Section
44571 \begin_layout Standard
44572 Here you can define the
44576 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44584 reference "sec:Index"
44591 \begin_layout Section
44595 \begin_layout Standard
44596 The PDF properties are explained in section
44597 \begin_inset space ~
44601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44603 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44610 \begin_layout Section
44614 \begin_layout Standard
44615 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44616 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44622 \begin_inset Index idx
44625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44637 \begin_inset Index idx
44640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44652 \begin_inset Index idx
44655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44667 \begin_inset Index idx
44670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44682 \begin_inset Index idx
44685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44687 packages ! mathdots
44697 \begin_inset Index idx
44700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44702 packages ! mathtools
44712 \begin_inset Index idx
44715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44727 \begin_inset Index idx
44730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44732 packages ! stackrel
44742 \begin_inset Index idx
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44747 packages ! stmaryrd
44757 \begin_inset Index idx
44760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44762 packages ! undertilde
44767 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44770 \begin_layout Description
44771 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44772 -errors in formulas,
44773 ensure that you have this enabled.
44776 \begin_layout Description
44777 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44778 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44779 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44783 \begin_layout Description
44784 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44787 \begin_inset space ~
44799 \begin_layout Description
44800 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44803 \begin_inset space ~
44815 \begin_layout Description
44816 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44827 \begin_layout Description
44828 mathtools is used for the math commands
44864 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44871 \begin_layout Description
44872 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44874 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44883 \begin_layout Description
44884 stackrel is used for the math command
44901 \begin_layout Description
44902 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44905 \begin_layout Description
44906 undertilde is used for the math command
44914 Accents for one Character
44923 \begin_layout Section
44927 \begin_layout Standard
44928 The float placement options are described in the section
44931 \begin_inset space ~
44939 \begin_inset space ~
44947 \begin_layout Section
44951 \begin_layout Standard
44952 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44954 Program Code Listings
44959 \begin_inset space ~
44967 \begin_layout Section
44971 \begin_layout Standard
44972 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44980 set to be used and set the
44985 The itemize environment is described in section
44986 \begin_inset space ~
44990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44992 reference "sec:Itemize"
44999 \begin_layout Standard
45000 You can furthermore specify a
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45008 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45009 command of the desired character.
45010 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45017 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45023 \begin_inset space \space{}
45027 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45037 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45038 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45041 \begin_layout Standard
45042 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45050 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45051 -packages in the preamble (menu
45054 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45055 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45058 \begin_inset space ~
45064 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45068 usepackage{textcomp}
45071 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45075 usepackage{amssymb}
45085 \begin_layout Section
45089 \begin_layout Standard
45090 Branches are described in section
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45097 reference "sec:Branches"
45104 \begin_layout Section
45106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45108 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45115 \begin_layout Standard
45116 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45119 \begin_layout Description
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45125 \begin_inset space ~
45128 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45148 View Master Document
45149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45156 Update Master Document
45157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45164 menu or the toolbar.
45165 The default is set in
45167 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45168 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45170 \begin_inset space ~
45173 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45183 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45190 \begin_layout Description
45192 \begin_inset space ~
45196 \begin_inset space ~
45199 Output settings for the menu
45201 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45209 For a detailed description see section
45211 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45224 \begin_layout Description
45226 \begin_inset space ~
45230 \begin_inset space ~
45233 Options offers settings for the export format
45241 \begin_inset space ~
45246 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45247 \begin_inset space ~
45250 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45259 settings are described in detail in section
45261 Math Output in XHTML
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45275 \begin_inset space ~
45279 \begin_inset space ~
45284 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45287 \begin_layout Description
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45294 Save transient properties
45296 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45297 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45298 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45302 \begin_layout Itemize
45303 the activation of change tracking
45306 \begin_layout Itemize
45307 the output of tracked changes
45310 \begin_layout Itemize
45311 the recording of the document directory path.
45314 \begin_layout Standard
45315 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45316 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45320 \begin_layout Section
45328 \begin_layout Standard
45329 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45331 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45333 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45335 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45339 \begin_layout Standard
45340 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45341 -syntax is given in section
45342 \begin_inset space ~
45346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45348 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45355 \begin_layout Chapter
45361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45363 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45368 \begin_inset Index idx
45371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45380 \begin_layout Standard
45381 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45383 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45387 It has the following submenus.
45390 \begin_layout Section
45394 \begin_layout Subsection
45398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45399 User Interface File
45400 \begin_inset Index idx
45403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45404 Customization ! of toolbars
45410 \begin_inset Index idx
45413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45414 Customization ! of menus
45422 \begin_layout Standard
45423 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45424 interface (ui) file.
45425 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45433 \begin_layout Description
45438 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45441 \begin_layout Description
45448 the menu entries in popup context menus
45451 \begin_layout Description
45456 specifies the toolbar buttons
45459 \begin_layout Standard
45460 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45461 and edit the entries.
45464 \begin_layout Standard
45465 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45477 entries must be finished with an explicit
45502 and in the case of the
45503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45515 The syntax for the entries is:
45518 \begin_layout Standard
45519 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45548 \begin_layout Standard
45550 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45553 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45554 -functions are listed in the menu
45556 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45566 \begin_layout Standard
45567 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45573 \begin_layout Standard
45574 For example, assuming you use the menu
45576 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45579 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45583 \begin_layout Standard
45584 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45608 \begin_layout Standard
45610 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45625 to have the sixth bookmark.
45628 \begin_layout Standard
45632 \begin_inset space ~
45637 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45638 's toolbar buttons.
45639 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45640 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45643 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45651 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45655 \begin_layout Standard
45658 Enable tool tips in main work area
45660 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45668 \begin_layout Standard
45673 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45674 should display in the menu
45676 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45678 \begin_inset space ~
45686 \begin_layout Subsection
45690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45694 \begin_layout Standard
45697 Restore window layouts and geometries
45700 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45701 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45705 \begin_layout Standard
45708 Restore cursor positions
45710 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45714 \begin_layout Standard
45717 Load opened files from last session
45719 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45723 \begin_layout Standard
45726 Clear all session information
45728 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45729 sessions (cursor positions, names
45730 of last opened documents, etc.).
45733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45737 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45742 \begin_inset Index idx
45745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45754 \begin_layout Standard
45757 Backup original documents when saving
45759 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45760 it was saved the last time.
45761 It is stored in the
45764 \begin_inset space ~
45770 \begin_inset space ~
45774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45776 reference "sec:Paths"
45780 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45783 \begin_inset space ~
45789 The backup file has the file extension
45790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45804 \begin_layout Standard
45807 Backup documents, every
45809 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45812 \begin_layout Standard
45815 Save documents compressed by default
45817 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45818 \begin_inset space ~
45822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45824 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45829 This applies to newly created documents only.
45830 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45834 Windows & work area
45837 \begin_layout Standard
45840 Open documents in tabs
45842 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45846 \begin_layout Standard
45851 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 \begin_inset space ~
45862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45864 reference "sec:Paths"
45868 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45875 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45876 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45877 of \SpecialChar LyX
45879 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45880 instance is created for each file.
45883 \begin_layout Standard
45886 Single close-tab button
45888 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45898 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45899 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45900 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45904 \begin_layout Standard
45905 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45913 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45914 before the change takes effect.
45922 \begin_layout Standard
45927 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45929 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45931 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45935 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45936 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45937 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45940 \begin_layout Subsection
45942 \begin_inset Index idx
45945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45954 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45962 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45966 \begin_layout Standard
45967 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45975 This section only deals with the fonts
45979 the \SpecialChar LyX
45981 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45985 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45996 \begin_layout Standard
45997 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46014 (depends on the system) as its
46017 \begin_inset space ~
46033 \begin_layout Standard
46034 You can change the font size with the
46041 \begin_layout Standard
46046 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46051 points have the size of 1
46052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46056 \begin_inset space ~
46060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46062 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46067 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46072 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46073 \begin_inset space ~
46077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46079 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46086 \begin_layout Standard
46089 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46091 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46092 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46093 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46094 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46095 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46097 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46104 \begin_layout Subsection
46106 \begin_inset Index idx
46109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46110 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46117 \begin_inset Index idx
46120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46129 \begin_layout Standard
46130 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46131 by choosing an item in the
46132 list and selecting the
46139 \begin_layout Standard
46140 By checking the option
46144 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46147 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46148 \begin_inset space ~
46152 \begin_inset space ~
46157 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46160 \begin_layout Subsection
46162 \begin_inset Index idx
46165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46174 \begin_layout Standard
46175 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46179 \begin_layout Standard
46184 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46185 This feature is described in section
46186 \begin_inset space ~
46190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46192 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46199 \begin_layout Standard
46200 Checking the option
46203 \begin_inset space ~
46207 \begin_inset space ~
46211 \begin_inset space ~
46216 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46219 \begin_layout Section
46221 \begin_inset Index idx
46224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46233 \begin_layout Subsection
46237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46241 \begin_layout Standard
46244 Cursor follows scrollbar
46246 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46250 \begin_layout Standard
46251 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46252 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46253 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46256 \begin_layout Standard
46259 Scroll below end of document
46261 is self-explanatory.
46264 \begin_layout Standard
46265 In \SpecialChar LyX
46266 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46273 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46275 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46276 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46279 \begin_layout Standard
46282 Sort environments alphabetically
46284 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46287 \begin_layout Standard
46290 Group environments by their category
46292 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46295 \begin_layout Standard
46300 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46315 \begin_layout Standard
46316 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46321 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46322 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46326 \begin_layout Subsection
46328 \begin_inset Index idx
46331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46338 \begin_inset Index idx
46341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46342 Settings ! Shortcuts
46350 \begin_layout Standard
46355 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46357 Several binding files are available, among them:
46360 \begin_layout Description
46361 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46364 \begin_layout Description
46365 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46377 \begin_layout Description
46378 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46389 \begin_layout Standard
46390 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46395 , and binding files for special languages.
46396 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46401 \begin_inset space \space{}
46405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46413 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46414 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46415 will try to use the appropriate binding
46419 \begin_layout Standard
46420 Some binding files, like
46424 , only have a limited scope.
46425 When looking at the end of the file
46429 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46432 \begin_layout Standard
46436 \begin_inset space ~
46440 \begin_inset space ~
46445 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46446 in the selected key binding file.
46449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46453 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46458 \begin_inset Index idx
46461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46462 Key Bindings ! Editing
46470 \begin_layout Standard
46471 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46472 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46473 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46474 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46477 Show key-bindings containing
46480 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46481 Insert there for example as keyword
46482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46489 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46490 functions that contain
46491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46499 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46500 All \SpecialChar LyX
46501 functions are also listed in the file
46506 that you will find in the
46513 \begin_layout Standard
46514 For example, to add the shortcut
46522 , select the function and press the
46527 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46528 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46531 \begin_layout Standard
46532 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46533 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46535 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46536 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46538 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46543 \begin_layout Standard
46544 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46547 \begin_layout Standard
46548 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46550 The syntax of the entries is:
46553 \begin_layout Standard
46559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46578 \begin_layout Standard
46579 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46580 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46608 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46609 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46610 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46611 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46613 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46617 , you needed to specify it as
46622 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46625 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46628 \begin_layout Subsection
46630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46632 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46637 \begin_inset Index idx
46640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46647 \begin_inset Index idx
46650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46651 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46659 \begin_layout Standard
46660 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46661 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46662 provides keyboard maps.
46663 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46664 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46667 \begin_inset space ~
46671 \begin_inset space ~
46676 and select the keyboard map file named
46683 \begin_layout Standard
46692 keyboard map and, if you use the
46696 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46699 arg "keymap-primary"
46705 arg "keymap-secondary"
46708 respectively or toggle between them with
46711 arg "keymap-toggle"
46717 \begin_layout Standard
46718 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46726 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46735 \begin_layout Standard
46736 You can also specify the mouse
46738 Wheel scrolling speed
46741 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46745 Middle mouse button pasting
46747 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46748 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46751 \begin_layout Standard
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46763 \begin_inset space ~
46768 you can select a key for zooming.
46769 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46772 \begin_layout Subsection
46776 \begin_layout Standard
46777 Input completion is described in section
46778 \begin_inset space ~
46782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46784 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46791 \begin_layout Section
46793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46800 \begin_inset Index idx
46803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46810 \begin_inset Index idx
46813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46822 \begin_layout Standard
46823 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46824 are normally determined during
46826 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46829 \begin_layout Description
46831 \begin_inset space ~
46834 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46835 's working directory.
46836 It is the default when you
46847 \begin_inset space ~
46855 \begin_layout Description
46857 \begin_inset space ~
46860 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46862 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46864 \begin_inset space ~
46868 \begin_inset space ~
46876 \begin_layout Description
46878 \begin_inset space ~
46881 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46887 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46891 \begin_inset Newline newline
46895 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46907 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46908 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46916 \begin_layout Description
46918 \begin_inset space ~
46922 \begin_inset Index idx
46925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46932 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46933 \begin_inset space ~
46937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46939 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46947 will be used to save the backups.
46948 \begin_inset Newline newline
46951 Backup files have the ending
46952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46962 \begin_layout Description
46964 \begin_inset space ~
46967 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46968 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46970 \begin_inset Newline newline
46977 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46983 You can edit this file with the program
46992 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46993 in its preferences under
46996 \begin_inset space ~
47002 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47007 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47009 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47010 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47016 and \SpecialChar LyX
47017 need to be running the same time.
47018 \begin_inset Newline newline
47021 The pipe is also used for the
47025 feature, see section
47026 \begin_inset space ~
47030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47032 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47037 \begin_inset Newline newline
47040 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47041 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47042 \begin_inset Newline newline
47058 \begin_layout Description
47060 \begin_inset space ~
47063 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47066 \begin_layout Description
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47071 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47072 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47073 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47076 \begin_layout Description
47078 \begin_inset space ~
47081 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47087 You only need to specify it if you are using
47091 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47093 For \SpecialChar LyX
47098 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47102 \begin_layout Description
47104 \begin_inset space ~
47107 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47108 When \SpecialChar LyX
47109 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47110 to find it on the system.
47111 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47113 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47122 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47123 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47126 \begin_layout Description
47128 \begin_inset space ~
47131 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47132 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47133 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47134 code or in the document
47136 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47138 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47139 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47140 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47141 scanned for the input files.
47142 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47143 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47145 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47146 compilation may fail for some documents.
47149 \begin_layout Section
47153 \begin_layout Standard
47154 Here you can insert your
47163 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47165 \begin_inset space ~
47169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47171 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47175 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47178 \begin_layout Section
47180 \begin_inset Index idx
47183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47184 Language ! Settings
47190 \begin_inset Index idx
47193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47194 Settings ! Language
47202 \begin_layout Subsection
47204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47206 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47213 \begin_layout Description
47215 \begin_inset space ~
47219 \begin_inset space ~
47222 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47224 You can find its actual translation status here:
47225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47227 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47235 \begin_layout Description
47237 \begin_inset space ~
47240 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47241 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47242 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47243 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47260 The most widespread language package is
47265 \begin_inset Index idx
47268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47275 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47277 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47278 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47279 come with the alternative
47285 \begin_inset Index idx
47288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47290 packages ! polyglossia
47295 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47296 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47302 The available selections are described in section
47303 \begin_inset space ~
47307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47309 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47316 \begin_layout Description
47318 \begin_inset space ~
47321 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47322 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47323 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47324 An example is the start command
47330 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47332 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47336 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47352 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47357 \begin_layout Description
47359 \begin_inset space ~
47367 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47368 command toggles the package on and off.
47371 \begin_layout Description
47373 \begin_inset space ~
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47380 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47384 \begin_layout Description
47386 \begin_inset space ~
47390 \begin_inset space ~
47393 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47397 \begin_layout Description
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47403 \begin_inset space ~
47406 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47407 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47408 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47410 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47417 \begin_layout Description
47419 \begin_inset space ~
47422 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47424 When this option is not set, the
47427 \begin_inset space ~
47432 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47434 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47437 \begin_inset space ~
47445 \begin_layout Description
47447 \begin_inset space ~
47453 \begin_inset space ~
47459 When it is not set, the
47462 \begin_inset space ~
47467 is set to the end of the document.
47470 \begin_layout Description
47472 \begin_inset space ~
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47479 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47480 language will be underlined in blue.
47483 \begin_layout Description
47485 \begin_inset space ~
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47492 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47493 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47496 \begin_layout Description
47498 \begin_inset space ~
47501 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47502 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47503 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47504 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47507 \begin_layout Subsection
47511 \begin_layout Standard
47512 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47513 \begin_inset space ~
47517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47519 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47526 \begin_layout Section
47530 \begin_layout Subsection
47532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47534 name "subsec:General-output"
47541 \begin_layout Description
47543 \begin_inset space ~
47546 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47548 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47550 \begin_inset space ~
47556 For a detailed description see section
47558 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47563 \begin_inset space ~
47571 \begin_layout Description
47573 \begin_inset space ~
47576 Options Options for the program
47580 that is used for the export format
47585 \begin_inset space ~
47589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47591 reference "subsec:Export"
47596 Possible options are listed in the
47601 \begin_inset Newline newline
47605 \begin_inset Flex URL
47608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47610 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47620 \begin_layout Description
47622 \begin_inset space ~
47626 \begin_inset space ~
47629 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47632 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47633 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47635 \begin_inset space ~
47641 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47644 \begin_layout Description
47646 \begin_inset space ~
47650 \begin_inset Index idx
47653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47660 \begin_inset Index idx
47663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47664 Settings ! Date format
47669 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47670 \begin_inset Newline newline
47674 \begin_inset Flex URL
47677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47679 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47685 \begin_inset Newline newline
47688 For example the format
47689 \begin_inset Newline newline
47693 \begin_inset Newline newline
47696 prints the date as day/month/year.
47699 \begin_layout Description
47701 \begin_inset space ~
47705 \begin_inset space ~
47708 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47709 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47712 \begin_layout Subsection
47718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47720 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47725 \begin_inset Index idx
47728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47729 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47738 \begin_layout Description
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47748 \begin_inset space ~
47752 \begin_inset space ~
47755 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47760 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47781 are used for Cyrillic.
47782 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47795 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47797 sets up in the background.
47798 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47801 \begin_layout Description
47803 \begin_inset space ~
47807 \begin_inset space ~
47811 \begin_inset space ~
47815 \begin_inset space ~
47818 options They only have an effect when the program
47822 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47825 \begin_layout Standard
47826 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47827 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47828 manuals of the applications.
47831 \begin_layout Description
47833 \begin_inset space ~
47836 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47837 \begin_inset space ~
47841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47843 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47850 \begin_layout Description
47852 \begin_inset space ~
47855 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47856 \begin_inset space ~
47860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47862 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47869 \begin_layout Description
47871 \begin_inset space ~
47874 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47881 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47888 \begin_layout Description
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47897 command Command for the program
47899 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47902 that is described in the section
47904 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47909 Additional Features
47914 \begin_layout Standard
47915 There are additionally the following options:
47918 \begin_layout Description
47920 \begin_inset space ~
47924 \begin_inset space ~
47928 \begin_inset space ~
47932 \begin_inset space ~
47937 \begin_inset space ~
47940 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47958 to separate folders.
47959 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47961 \begin_inset Index idx
47964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47971 \begin_inset Index idx
47974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47983 \begin_layout Description
47985 \begin_inset space ~
47989 \begin_inset space ~
47993 \begin_inset space ~
47997 \begin_inset space ~
48001 \begin_inset space ~
48005 \begin_inset space ~
48008 changes Removes all manually set
48014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48017 \begin_inset space ~
48022 dialog when changing the document class.
48025 \begin_layout Section
48027 \begin_inset space ~
48031 \begin_inset Index idx
48034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48043 \begin_layout Subsection
48045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48047 name "subsec:Converters"
48052 \begin_inset Index idx
48055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48064 \begin_layout Standard
48065 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48066 from one format to another.
48067 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48068 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48075 \begin_inset space ~
48080 field and press the
48085 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48089 \begin_inset space ~
48094 drop-down list, modify the
48098 field and press the
48105 \begin_layout Standard
48108 Converter File Cache
48114 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48116 Maximum Age (in days
48119 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48120 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48123 \begin_layout Standard
48124 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48125 definition, is described in the section
48136 \begin_layout Subsection
48138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48140 name "sec:File-Formats"
48145 \begin_inset Index idx
48148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48155 \begin_inset Index idx
48158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48167 \begin_layout Standard
48168 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48178 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48181 \begin_layout Standard
48182 You can also define the
48184 Default output format
48186 that is used when you use
48188 View, Update, View Master Document
48192 Update Master Document
48198 menu or the toolbar.
48201 \begin_layout Standard
48202 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48213 \begin_layout Standard
48214 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48216 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48217 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48218 This is done by specifying a
48223 More about this is described in the section
48234 \begin_layout Chapter
48235 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48237 \begin_inset Index idx
48240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48249 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48256 \begin_layout Standard
48258 \begin_inset space ~
48262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48264 reference "tab:Units"
48268 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48269 and used in this documentation.
48272 \begin_layout Standard
48273 \begin_inset Float table
48279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48280 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48298 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48306 \begin_inset Tabular
48307 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48308 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48310 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48311 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48464 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48735 scaled point (65536
48736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48803 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48927 % of original image width
48932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49016 \begin_layout Standard
49017 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49020 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49027 \begin_layout Bibliography
49028 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49029 LatexCommand bibitem
49036 The \SpecialChar LyX
49038 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49041 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49047 \begin_inset Newline newline
49051 \begin_inset Flex URL
49054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49056 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49064 \begin_layout Bibliography
49065 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49066 LatexCommand bibitem
49067 key "latexcompanion"
49072 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49074 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49075 Companion Second Edition.
49078 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49081 \begin_layout Bibliography
49082 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49083 LatexCommand bibitem
49089 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49092 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49096 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49099 \begin_layout Bibliography
49100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49101 LatexCommand bibitem
49110 : A Document Preparation System.
49113 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49116 \begin_layout Bibliography
49117 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49118 LatexCommand bibitem
49128 The \SpecialChar TeX
49132 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49135 \begin_layout Bibliography
49136 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49137 LatexCommand bibitem
49143 The \SpecialChar TeX
49145 \begin_inset Newline newline
49149 \begin_inset Flex URL
49152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49154 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49162 \begin_layout Bibliography
49163 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49164 LatexCommand bibitem
49170 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49172 \begin_inset Newline newline
49176 \begin_inset Flex URL
49179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49181 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49189 \begin_layout Bibliography
49190 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49191 LatexCommand bibitem
49198 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49200 name "Documentation"
49201 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49208 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49212 \begin_inset Newline newline
49216 \begin_inset Flex URL
49219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49221 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49229 \begin_layout Bibliography
49230 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49231 LatexCommand bibitem
49238 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49240 name "Documentation"
49241 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49246 how to use the program
49248 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49252 \begin_inset Newline newline
49256 \begin_inset Flex URL
49259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49261 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49269 \begin_layout Bibliography
49270 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49271 LatexCommand bibitem
49278 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49280 name "Documentation"
49281 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49286 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49292 \begin_inset Index idx
49295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49297 packages ! biblatex
49303 \begin_inset Newline newline
49307 \begin_inset Flex URL
49310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49312 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49320 \begin_layout Bibliography
49321 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49322 LatexCommand bibitem
49329 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49331 name "Documentation"
49332 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49337 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49343 \begin_inset Index idx
49346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49354 \begin_inset Newline newline
49358 \begin_inset Flex URL
49361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49363 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49371 \begin_layout Bibliography
49372 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49373 LatexCommand bibitem
49380 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49382 name "Documentation"
49383 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49393 \begin_inset Newline newline
49397 \begin_inset Flex URL
49400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49402 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49410 \begin_layout Bibliography
49411 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49412 LatexCommand bibitem
49413 key "makeindex-man"
49419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49422 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49432 \begin_inset Newline newline
49436 \begin_inset Flex URL
49439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49441 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49449 \begin_layout Bibliography
49450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49451 LatexCommand bibitem
49458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49460 name "Documentation"
49461 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49471 \begin_inset Newline newline
49475 \begin_inset Flex URL
49478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49480 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49488 \begin_layout Bibliography
49489 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49490 LatexCommand bibitem
49497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49499 name "Documentation"
49500 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49505 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49507 \begin_inset Newline newline
49511 \begin_inset Flex URL
49514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49516 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49524 \begin_layout Bibliography
49525 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49526 LatexCommand bibitem
49533 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49535 name "Documentation"
49536 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49541 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49547 \begin_inset Index idx
49550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49558 \begin_inset Newline newline
49562 \begin_inset Flex URL
49565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49567 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49575 \begin_layout Bibliography
49576 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49577 LatexCommand bibitem
49584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49586 name "Documentation"
49587 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49592 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49598 \begin_inset Index idx
49601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49603 packages ! enumitem
49609 \begin_inset Newline newline
49613 \begin_inset Flex URL
49616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49618 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49626 \begin_layout Bibliography
49627 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49628 LatexCommand bibitem
49635 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49637 name "Documentation"
49638 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49643 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49649 \begin_inset Index idx
49652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49654 packages ! fancyhdr
49660 \begin_inset Newline newline
49664 \begin_inset Flex URL
49667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49669 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49677 \begin_layout Bibliography
49678 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49679 LatexCommand bibitem
49686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49688 name "Documentation"
49689 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
49694 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49700 \begin_inset Index idx
49703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49705 packages ! hyperref
49711 \begin_inset Newline newline
49715 \begin_inset Flex URL
49718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49720 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
49728 \begin_layout Bibliography
49729 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49730 LatexCommand bibitem
49737 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49739 name "Documentation"
49740 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49745 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49751 \begin_inset Index idx
49754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49756 packages ! microtpye
49762 \begin_inset Newline newline
49766 \begin_inset Flex URL
49769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49771 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49779 \begin_layout Bibliography
49780 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49781 LatexCommand bibitem
49788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49790 name "Documentation"
49791 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49796 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49802 \begin_inset Index idx
49805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49813 \begin_inset Newline newline
49817 \begin_inset Flex URL
49820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49822 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49830 \begin_layout Bibliography
49831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49832 LatexCommand bibitem
49839 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49841 name "Documentation"
49842 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49847 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49853 \begin_inset Index idx
49856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49858 packages ! prettyref
49864 \begin_inset Newline newline
49868 \begin_inset Flex URL
49871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49873 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49881 \begin_layout Bibliography
49882 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49883 LatexCommand bibitem
49890 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49892 name "Documentation"
49893 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49898 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49904 \begin_inset Index idx
49907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49909 packages ! refstyle
49915 \begin_inset Newline newline
49919 \begin_inset Flex URL
49922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49924 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49932 \begin_layout Bibliography
49933 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49934 LatexCommand bibitem
49941 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49944 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49949 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49951 \begin_inset Newline newline
49955 \begin_inset Flex URL
49958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49960 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49968 \begin_layout Bibliography
49969 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49970 LatexCommand bibitem
49977 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49980 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49985 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49987 \begin_inset Newline newline
49991 \begin_inset Flex URL
49994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49996 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50004 \begin_layout Bibliography
50005 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50006 LatexCommand bibitem
50013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50016 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50021 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50022 for Cyrillic languages:
50023 \begin_inset Newline newline
50027 \begin_inset Flex URL
50030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50032 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50040 \begin_layout Bibliography
50041 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50042 LatexCommand bibitem
50049 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50052 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50057 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50059 \begin_inset Newline newline
50063 \begin_inset Flex URL
50066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50068 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50076 \begin_layout Bibliography
50077 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50078 LatexCommand bibitem
50085 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50088 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50093 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50095 \begin_inset Newline newline
50099 \begin_inset Flex URL
50102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50104 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50112 \begin_layout Bibliography
50113 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50114 LatexCommand bibitem
50121 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50124 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50129 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50131 \begin_inset Newline newline
50135 \begin_inset Flex URL
50138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50140 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50148 \begin_layout Standard
50149 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50183 \begin_inset Note Note
50186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50193 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50194 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50195 bibliography is the second one:
50203 \begin_layout Standard
50204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50205 LatexCommand bibtex
50206 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50207 options "biblio/alphadin"
50214 \begin_layout Standard
50215 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50219 \begin_layout Standard
50223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50229 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50238 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50246 \begin_inset Note Note
50249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50250 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50251 \begin_inset space ~
50255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50257 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50269 \begin_layout Standard
50270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50271 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50277 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50278 LatexCommand printindex